`
RAM 1500 CLASSIC
2020 OWNER’S MANUAL
20_DS_OM_EN_USC
SECOND EDITION
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your
vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next
appointment, we know you will find the app an important extension of your Ram vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App
Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
2020 RAM 1500 CLASSIC
RAMTRUCKS.COM (U.S.) RAMTRUCK.CA (CANADA)
©2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF
THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLET
OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
CANADA
MOPAR.COM/OM
U.S.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the
road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle
is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit
the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference for common
questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S.), www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously
impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with
a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may
also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and
equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or
make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-866-726-4636 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada), or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting
www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower
and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................. 8
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ...................................................................................11
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................................102
4 SAFETY ......................................................................................................................................... 129
5 STARTING AND OPERATING ............................................................................................... 185
6 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .................................................................................................... 236
7 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................... 271
8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................ 322
9 MULTIMEDIA ............................................................................................................................... 331
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................390
11 INDEX .............................................................................................................................................394
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL .................................9
Essential Information .................................... 9
Symbols .......................................................... 9
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS............................9
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ...............................10
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.........10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED ...............11
KEYS ......................................................................12
Key Fobs.......................................................12
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................16
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) —
If Equipped ................................................... 16
Key-In-Ignition Reminder.............................16
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .........................16
How To Use Remote Start ...........................16
Remote Start Abort Message......................17
To Enter Remote Start Mode ...................... 17
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle ..................................................17
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle ..........................................................17
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped ................................................... 18
General Information ....................................18
SENTRY KEY.......................................................... 18
Key Programming ....................................... 19
Replacement Keys....................................... 19
General Information .................................... 19
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM ................................ 20
To Arm The System...................................... 20
To Disarm The System ................................ 21
Rearming Of The System............................. 21
Security System Manual Override .............. 21
DOORS .................................................................. 21
Manual Door Locks...................................... 21
Power Door Locks — If Equipped ................ 22
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry —
If Equipped .................................................. 23
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ......... 25
Child-Protection Door Lock ......................... 26
SEATS .................................................................... 26
Manual Front Seat Adjustment................... 27
Manual Rear Seat Adjustment ................... 28
Power Driver Seat Adjustment —
If Equipped................................................... 28
Power Passenger Seat Adjustment —
If Equipped................................................... 29
Heated Seats — If Equipped ....................... 30
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped................... 31
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers (Regular Cab
Models)......................................................... 32
HEAD RESTRAINTS ..............................................32
Front Head Restraint Adjustment............... 32
Rear Head Restraint Adjustment ............... 33
Front Head Restraint Removal ................... 33
Rear Head Restraint Removal.................... 34
STEERING WHEEL ...............................................34
Tilt Steering Column.................................... 34
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ...... 34
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —
IF EQUIPPED .........................................................35
MIRRORS ..............................................................36
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped ...... 36
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped ...36
Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View
Camera Display — If Equipped ................... 37
Outside Mirrors ........................................... 37
Driver's Outside Automatic Dimming
Mirror — If Equipped.................................... 38
Power Mirrors — If Equipped ...................... 38
Power Folding Outside Mirrors For
Standard And Trailer Tow — If Equipped .... 38
Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped ......... 40
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped..................... 40
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse —
If Equipped................................................... 40
Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped..... 40
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................41
Multifunction Lever......................................41
Headlight Switch..........................................41
Headlights .................................................... 42
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped ................................................... 42
High/Low Beam Switch ............................... 42
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped ................................................... 42
Flash-To-Pass ...............................................43
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ..........43
Parking Lights And Panel Lights ................. 43
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)......................... 44
Headlight Delay............................................44
Lights-On Reminder.....................................44
Fog Lights — If Equipped ............................44
Turn Signals .................................................44
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ............. 44
Cargo Light With Bed Lights —
If Equipped .................................................. 45
Battery Saver................................................45
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................46
Courtesy Lights ............................................46
Illuminated Approach .................................47
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS............. 48
Windshield Wipers....................................... 48
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ........... 49
CLIMATE CONTROLS ........................................... 50
Manual Climate Control Overview ............. 50
Automatic Climate Control Overview .......... 59
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped .................................................. 66
Operating Tips ............................................. 66
WINDOWS ............................................................ 68
Power Windows — If Equipped ................... 68
Wind Buffeting ............................................ 70
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED.................... 70
Opening Sunroof.......................................... 70
Closing Sunroof............................................ 71
Wind Buffeting ............................................ 71
Sunshade Operation.................................... 71
Pinch Protect Feature.................................. 71
Sunroof Maintenance.................................. 71
Ignition Off Operation .................................. 71
HOOD ..................................................................... 72
To Open The Hood ....................................... 72
To Close The Hood....................................... 72
TAILGATE............................................................... 72
Opening ........................................................ 72
Closing.......................................................... 72
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED .........73
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink®.................................................. 73
Programming A Rolling Code ...................... 74
Programming A Non-Rolling Code .............. 75
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming..... 76
Using HomeLink®........................................ 77
Security ........................................................ 77
Troubleshooting Tips................................... 77
General Information .................................... 78
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ........................................78
Storage......................................................... 78
Electrical Power Outlets .............................. 83
Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver —
If Equipped................................................... 85
Power Inverter — If Equipped ..................... 85
Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped ............... 86
PICKUP BOX .........................................................86
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED.....................................87
RamBox Integrated Box Side Storage
Bins............................................................... 87
Locking And Unlocking RamBox................. 88
RamBox Safety Warning ............................. 89
Bed Extender — If Equipped........................ 90
Bed Rail Tie-Down System —
If Equipped .................................................. 93
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
SLIDE-IN CAMPERS .............................................94
Camper Applications ................................... 94
EASY-OFF TAILGATE .............................................94
Disconnecting The Rear Camera Or Remote
Keyless Entry — If Equipped........................95
Removing The Tailgate................................ 95
Locking Tailgate...........................................96
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED .....96
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Removal................ 96
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation............ 99
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning..............101
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .......................... 102
Base Instrument Cluster Descriptions .....103
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .................. 104
Premium Instrument Cluster
Descriptions ...............................................105
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .................... 106
Instrument Cluster Display Controls.........106
Oil Life Reset .............................................108
Display Menu Items...................................108
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped ...............................115
Instrument Cluster Display Programmable
Features .....................................................116
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES................118
Red Warning Lights ...................................118
Yellow Warning Lights ...............................121
Yellow Indicator Lights ..............................124
Green Indicator Lights...............................125
White Indicator Lights ...............................126
Blue Indicator Lights..................................126
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ....127
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .............................................127
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS.........................................................128
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES.............................................129
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................129
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...130
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.........................138
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)...........................................138
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..................143
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....143
Important Safety Precautions...................143
Seat Belt Systems .....................................144
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ....153
Child Restraints .........................................162
Transporting Pets .....................................181
SAFETY TIPS ...................................................... 181
Transporting Passengers ..........................181
Exhaust Gas...............................................182
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ................................................182
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle...................................184
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE —
GASOLINE ENGINE ........................................... 185
Automatic Transmission............................185
Tip Start Feature .......................................185
AutoPark — Rotary Gear Selector Only .....185
If Engine Fails To Start .............................187
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) .........................188
After Starting..............................................188
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED........ 188
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ...... 188
PARKING BRAKE .............................................. 189
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ........................... 190
Key Ignition Park Interlock —
If Equipped.................................................191
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System........................................................191
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission ......191
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................... 196
Four-Position Electronically Shifted
Transfer Case.............................................196
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL .......................... 200
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — 5.7L ENGINES
ONLY (IF EQUIPPED).......................................... 200
POWER STEERING............................................. 201
Electric Power Steering ............................201
SPEED CONTROL .............................................. 201
To Activate..................................................202
To Set A Desired Speed.............................202
To Vary The Speed Setting ........................202
To Accelerate For Passing ........................203
To Resume Speed......................................203
To Deactivate .............................................203
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED....................................................... 203
ParkSense Sensors ...................................204
ParkSense Warning Display......................204
ParkSense Display.....................................204
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........206
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System........................................................206
Cleaning The ParkSense System..............206
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ....207
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK
ASSIST .................................................................208
ParkSense Sensors ...................................208
ParkSense Warning Display......................208
ParkSense Display.....................................209
Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or
Rear ParkSense.........................................211
Service The ParkSense Park Assist
System........................................................211
Cleaning The ParkSense System..............212
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ....212
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA .............213
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GAS ENGINE ......215
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ................216
VEHICLE LOADING ............................................216
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ......216
Payload.......................................................216
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ............216
Tire Size......................................................216
Rim Size .....................................................216
Inflation Pressure ......................................216
Curb Weight................................................217
Loading.......................................................217
TRAILER TOWING...............................................217
Common Towing Definitions .....................217
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer
Weight ........................................................220
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) ........................................221
Trailer And Tongue Weight .......................221
Towing Requirements ..............................222
Towing Tips ...............................................227
SNOWPLOW ...................................................... 228
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) ......................... 229
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle........................................................229
Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive
Models........................................................230
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
Models........................................................230
DRIVING TIPS ..................................................... 233
Driving On Slippery Surfaces ...................233
Driving Through Water .............................233
Off-Road Driving Tips.................................235
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...................... 236
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED.... 236
General Information ..................................240
FUSES.................................................................. 241
Power Distribution Center.........................241
BULB REPLACEMENT ........................................ 248
Replacement Bulbs ...................................248
Replacing Exterior Bulbs...........................249
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ...................... 252
Jack Location .............................................253
Removal Of Jack And Tools.......................253
Removing The Spare Tire ..........................254
Preparations For Jacking...........................256
Jacking Instructions...................................256
To Stow The Flat Or Spare.........................259
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools ...............261
JUMP STARTING ................................................ 262
Preparations For Jump Start.....................262
Jump Starting Procedure...........................263
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ......................... 265
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 - SPEED
TRANSMISSION.................................................. 265
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ............................ 267
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ....................... 268
Two-Wheel Drive Models...........................269
Four-Wheel Drive Models ..........................269
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped.......270
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS) ................................................. 270
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)....................... 270
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING................................... 271
Maintenance Plan......................................271
ENGINE COMPARTMENT...................................276
3.6L Engine................................................276
5.7L Engine ...............................................277
Checking Oil Level — Gas Engine .............278
Adding Washer Fluid..................................278
Maintenance-Free Battery .......................278
Pressure Washing......................................279
DEALER SERVICE ..............................................279
Engine Oil — Gas Engine ...........................279
Engine Oil Filter..........................................281
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ...........................281
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...................283
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ...............286
Body Lubrication........................................287
Windshield Wiper Blades ..........................287
Exhaust System ........................................289
Cooling System .........................................291
Brake System ............................................295
Automatic Transmission ...........................296
Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle
Fluid Level .................................................297
Transfer Case ............................................297
HOISTING ............................................................298
TIRES....................................................................298
Tire Safety Information .............................298
Tires — General Information ....................306
Tire Types ...................................................310
Spare Tires — If Equipped .........................311
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ....................313
Tire Chains and Traction Devices ............314
Tire Rotation Recommendations .............315
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................................... 315
Treadwear ..................................................315
Traction Grades .........................................316
Temperature Grades .................................316
STORING THE VEHICLE .................................... 316
BODYWORK........................................................ 316
Protection From Atmospheric Agents.......316
Body And Underbody Maintenance..........317
Preserving The Bodywork..........................317
INTERIORS ......................................................... 319
Seats And Fabric Parts..............................319
Plastic And Coated Parts...........................320
Leather Parts .............................................321
Glass Surfaces ..........................................321
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA ...................................... 322
Vehicle Identification Number ..................322
BRAKE SYSTEM ................................................ 322
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS................................................ 322
Torque Specifications................................322
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...................................... 323
3.6L Engine ................................................323
5.7L Engine ................................................324
Reformulated Gasoline ............................324
Materials Added To Fuel ...........................324
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends......................325
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles ......................................................325
CNG And LP Fuel System
Modifications .............................................325
MMT In Gasoline........................................325
Fuel System Cautions................................326
Carbon Monoxide Warnings......................326
FLUID CAPACITIES ............................................ 327
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ............................... 328
Engine ........................................................328
Chassis ......................................................330
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ....................................... 331
CYBERSECURITY ............................................... 331
UCONNECT SETTINGS ....................................... 332
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 3 Settings ..................................333
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Settings..................345
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION .......... 359
Safety Guidelines.......................................359
UCONNECT 3.0 ...................................................360
Introduction................................................360
Radio Mode................................................361
Media Mode ...............................................363
Phone Mode...............................................365
UCONNECT 3 WITH 5-INCH DISPLAY ..............367
Introduction................................................367
Radio Mode................................................368
Media Mode ...............................................371
Phone Mode...............................................374
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED .......................................................380
Radio Operation.........................................381
Media Mode ...............................................381
IPOD®/USB/MP3 CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED ......................................................381
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ....381
Regulatory And Safety Information...........381
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS .....................................................................383
Introducing Uconnect ................................383
Get Started.................................................383
Basic Voice Commands.............................384
Radio ..........................................................384
Media..........................................................384
Phone .........................................................385
Voice Text Reply.........................................385
Climate (4C/4C NAV).................................386
Navigation (4C NAV) ..................................386
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped .................386
Using Do Not Disturb ................................387
Android Auto™ — If Equipped ..................387
Apple CarPlay® — If Equipped .................388
General Information ..................................388
Additional Information...............................389
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .................................................. 390
Prepare For The Appointment .................. 390
Prepare A List.............................................390
Be Reasonable With Requests.................390
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ............................... 390
FCA US LLC Customer Center...................391
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........391
Mexico ........................................................391
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands............391
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .....................391
Service Contract .......................................391
WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................. 392
MOPAR PARTS................................................... 392
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................ 392
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. .......................................392
In Canada...................................................392
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ........................ 393
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer, congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and
maneuvers differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the
two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited
for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your
driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome
the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision. Refer to the “Driving Tips” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance
of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of
the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers, the vehicle's warranty coverage, and the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its
validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions,
recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated
in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information which is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any
content introduced throughout the Owner's Information, that may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If
Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant
improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial
reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that an authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts,
and cares about your satisfaction.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's
equipment.
The detailed Index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose symbols indicate precautions to be observed when using this component. Refer to “Warning
Lights and Messages” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information on the symbols used in your vehicle.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or special equipment installed by van conversion/camper manufacturers/body
builders. US residents refer to the Warranty Information, Section 2.1.C. Canadian residents refer to the “What Is Not Covered” section of the Warranty
Information. Such equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and service on these items,
contact the applicable manufacturer.
Operating instructions for the special equipment installed by the conversion/camper manufacturer should also be supplied with your vehicle. If these
instructions are missing, please contact an authorized dealer for assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the applicable manufacturer.
For information on the Body Builder’s Guide refer to www.rambodybuilder.com. This website contains dimensional and technical specifications for your
vehicle. It is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer's technical support. For service issues, contact an authorized dealer.
1
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also contains
CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED
Access your Owner’s Information right through
your Uconnect 4C or 4C NAV touchscreen
system (if equipped).
To access the Vehicle User Guide on your
Uconnect Touchscreen: Press the Uconnect
Apps button. From there, press the Vehicle User
Guide icon on your touchscreen. No Uconnect
registration is required.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Vehicle User
Guide Touchscreen Icon
NOTE:
Vehicle User Guide features are not available
while the vehicle is moving. If you try to access
while the vehicle is in motion, the system will
display the message “Feature not available
while the vehicle is in motion”.
Pre-Installed Features
Your User Guide — Updated in real-time
Touchscreen convenience
Maintenance schedules and information
Comprehensive icon and symbol glossary
Available when and where you need it
Customizable interface
Multilingual
Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you
will be able to explore your warranty information
and radio manual when and where you need
them. Your Uconnect system displays the
Vehicle User Guide on your touchscreen radio to
assist in better understanding your vehicle.
There’s no app to download, no phone to
connect and no external device needed for
playback. Plus, it’s updated throughout the
year, in real-time, so it never goes out of date.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Features/Benefits
Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen
radio
Enhanced search and browsing capability
Robust NAV application (if equipped)
Add selected topics to a fast-access Favor-
ites category
Icon and symbol glossary
Warranty information
Crucial driver information and assistance:
Operating Instructions
Warranty Information
Fluid Level Standards
Maintenance Schedules
Emergency Procedures
911 Contact and More
TIP:
When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to add it
to your Favorites, for easy access in the future.
KEYS
Key Fobs
Your vehicle uses a wireless ignition node
system that consists of a key fob and Keyless
Enter-N-Go button.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be found if it is located next
to a mobile phone, laptop, cell phone charging
cable source, or other electronic device; these
devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal.
WIN Key Fob With Integrated Key
The wireless ignition node key fob operates the
ignition switch. Insert the square end of the key
fob into the ignition switch located on the
instrument panel and rotate to the desired
position. It also contains the key fob and an
emergency key, which stores in the rear of the
key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the
vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the
key fob become depleted. You can keep the
emergency key with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the
mechanical latch at the top of the key fob
sideways with your thumb and then pull the key
out with your other hand.
Key Fob Emergency Key
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
NOTE:
When using the emergency key to gain access
to your vehicle, be aware that the security alarm
may be triggered. Insert the key into the ignition
and place the ignition in the ON/RUN mode to
disarm the security system.
The Remote Keyless Entry system allows you to
lock or unlock all doors, tailgate, and the
RamBox (if equipped) as well as activate the
Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately
66 ft (20 m) using a key fob with integrated key.
The key fob does not need to be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system. Push and release
the lock button on the key fob to lock all doors,
the tailgate and the RamBox (if equipped). The
turn signal lights will flash and the horn will
chirp to acknowledge the signal.
NOTE:
Inserting the key fob with integrated key into the
ignition switch disables the system from
responding to any button pushes from that key
fob. Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and
above disables the system from responding to
all key fob buttons for all key fobs.
To Unlock The Doors And Tailgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key
fob once to unlock the driver’s door. Push the
unlock button twice within five seconds to
unlock all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox (if
equipped). The turn signal lights will flash to
acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated
entry system will also turn on.
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display or Uconnect
Settings are setup for the driver door first, other-
wise this will unlock all doors.
To Lock The Doors And Tailgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob
to lock all doors, the tailgate, and the RamBox
(if equipped). The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when
the doors are locked with the key fob. This
feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen
radio, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen
radio, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE:
Pushing the lock button on the key fob while you
are in the vehicle will activate the vehicle secu-
rity alarm system. Opening a door with the
vehicle security alarm system activated will
cause the alarm to sound. Push the unlock
button to deactivate the vehicle security alarm
system.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push
the Panic button on the key fob. When the Panic
Alarm is activated, the turn signals will flash, the
horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights
will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes
unless you turn it off by either pushing the Panic
button a second time, or drive the vehicle at a
speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
The interior lights will turn off if you place the
ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position while
the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the
exterior lights and horn will remain on.
You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m)
from the vehicle when using the key fob to
turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio
frequency noises emitted by the system.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob With
Remote Control
The replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate for further
information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are
on the back housing or the printed circuit
board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the
mechanical latch on the back of the key
fob sideways with your thumb, and then
pull the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Separating key fob halves requires screw
removal (if equipped), and gently prying the
two halves of the key fob apart. Make sure
not to damage the seal during removal.
Remove Screw From Key Fob Case
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
Separating Key Fob Case
3. Remove the battery by turning the back
cover over (battery facing downward) and
tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as
a table or similar, then replace the battery.
When replacing the battery, match the (+)
sign on the battery to the (+) sign on the
inside of the battery clip, located on the
back cover. Avoid touching the new battery
with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery,
clean it with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two
halves together, reposition and secure the
screw as shown in step two for removal.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by
an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
IGNITION SWITCH
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) — If Equipped
The Ignition Node Module (IGNM) operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has four
operating positions, three with detents and one
that is spring-loaded. The detent positions are
OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position is a
spring-loaded momentary contact position.
When released from the START position, the
switch automatically returns to the ON/RUN
position.
Wireless Ignition Switch
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver's door when the key fob is in
the ignition with the ignition switch in the OFF or
ACC position, will sound a chime to remind you
to remove the key fob.
NOTE:
Keyed Ignition systems will chime in OFF or
ACC when the driver door is open.
The instrument cluster display will display
“Key In Ignition.”
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive
(brake pedal not pushed)
Ignition key removed from ignition switch
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
Fuel meets minimum requirement
System not disabled from previous remote
start event
Vehicle security alarm not active
Malfunction Indicator light is not illuminated
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
Remote Start Abort Message
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Cancelled — System Fault
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to
Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays
active until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the Remote Start button on
the key fob twice within five seconds. The
parking lights will flash, vehicle doors will lock,
and the horn will chirp twice (if programmed).
Once the vehicle has started, the engine will run
for 15 minutes.
NOTE:
If your power door locks were unlocked,
Remote Start will automatically lock the
doors.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down
in 10 seconds.
The park lamps will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power
sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start
mode.
The engine can be started two consecutive
times (two 15 minute cycles) with the key
fob. However, the ignition must be placed in
the ON/RUN position before you can repeat
the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle
Push and release the remote start button one
time or allow the engine to run for the entire
15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable the remote start button for two
seconds after receiving a valid remote start
request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle
Before the end of the 15 minute cycle, push and
release the unlock button on the key fob to
unlock the doors and disarm the vehicle
security alarm system (if equipped). Then, prior
to the end of the 15 minute cycle, place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If
Equipped
When Remote Start is activated, the heated
steering wheel and driver heated seat features
will automatically turn on in cold weather. In
warm weather, the driver vented seat feature
will automatically turn on when the remote start
is activated. These features will stay on through
the duration of Remote Start or until the ignition
switch is placed in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The Remote Start Comfort System can be acti-
vated and deactivated through the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information on Remote Start
Comfort System operation.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
The system uses a key fob, wireless ignition
node system, and a Radio Frequency (RF)
receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle
operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are
programmed to the vehicle can be used to start
and operate the vehicle. The system cannot
reprogram a key fob obtained from another
vehicle.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position, the vehicle security light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates
that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the
bulb check, it indicates that someone
attempted to start the engine with an invalid key
fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used to
start the engine but there is an issue with the
vehicle electronics, the engine will start and
shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there
is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by
an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics.
Key Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer.
Replacement Keys
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
NOTE:
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
CAUTION!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle
doors and ignition for unauthorized operation.
When the vehicle security alarm is activated,
interior switches for door locks are disabled.
The system provides both audible and visible
signals for the first three minutes. The horn will
sound, the headlights will turn on, the park
lamps and/or turn signals will flash and vehicle
security light will flash repeatedly. For an
additional 15 minutes only, the headlights will
turn on, the park lamps and/or turn signals, and
vehicle security light will flash.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security
alarm:
1. Remove the key from the ignition system.
Refer to "Ignition" in this chapter for further
information.
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lock the vehicle:
Push the lock button on the interior
power door lock switch with the driver
and/or passenger door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid
key fob available in the same exterior
zone. Refer to "Keyless Enter- N-Go —
Passive Entry" in “Doors” in this chapter
for further information.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
The vehicle security alarm will set when you use
the power door locks, or use the key fob to lock
the doors. After all the doors are locked and
closed, the vehicle security light in the
instrument panel cluster, will flash rapidly for
about 16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is
being set. After the alarm is set, the vehicle
security light will flash at a slower rate to
indicate that the system is armed.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
(Continued)
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
1. Push the unlock button on the key fob.
2. Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle
with a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
passive entry door handle. Refer to "Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry" in “Doors” in
this chapter for further information (if
equipped).
3. Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the vehicle security
alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle
security alarm will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
Rearming Of The System
The vehicle security alarm will rearm itself after
the 15 additional minutes of headlights and
vehicle security light flashing, if the system has
not been disabled. If the condition which
initiated the alarm is still present, the system
will ignore that condition and monitor the
remaining doors and ignition.
Security System Manual Override
The vehicle security alarm will not arm/disarm if
you lock/unlock the doors using the manual
door lock.
DOORS
Manual Door Locks
Front and rear doors may be locked by moving
the lock knob down or unlocked by moving the
lock knob up.
Door Lock Knob
Front doors may be opened with the inside door
handle without lifting the lock knob.
Doors locked before closing will remain locked
when closed.
The emergency key will unlock the driver door
lock on your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
For personal security and safety in the
event of an collision, lock the vehicle doors
as you drive as well as when you park and
leave the vehicle.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
The power door lock switches are on each front
door trim panel. Use these switches to lock or
unlock the doors.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be able to be detected by
the vehicle Keyless Enter-N-Go system if it is
located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other
electronic device; these devices may block the
key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
Keyless Enter-N-Go system from starting the
vehicle.
Power Door Lock Switches
If you push the power door lock switch while the
key fob is in the ignition, and any front door is
open, the power locks will not operate. This
prevents you from accidentally locking your key
fob in the vehicle. Removing the key fob or
closing the door will allow the locks to operate.
A chime will sound if the key fob is in the ignition
switch and a door is open, as a reminder to
remove the key fob.
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the
automatic transmission into PARK or
REVERSE, apply the parking brake, place
the ignition in the OFF position, remove the
key fobs from vehicle, and lock all doors.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry — If
Equipped
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key
fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has
been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry
door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be
affected, resulting in a slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and will arm the security
alarm (if equipped).
The vehicle security alarm can be armed/
disarmed by pushing the Passive Entry key
fob lock/unlock buttons (if equipped).
The key fob may not be able to be detected by
the vehicle Passive Entry system if it is
located next to a mobile phone, laptop or
other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob's wireless signal and
prevent the passive entry handle from
locking/unlocking the vehicle.
To Unlock From The Driver's Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver door handle, grab the front
driver door handle to unlock the driver's door
automatically. The interior door panel lock knob
will raise when the door is unlocked.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed,
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the
front driver’s door handle. To select between
“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All
Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the
front passenger door handle to unlock all doors
automatically. The interior door panel lock knob
will raise when the door is unlocked.
NOTE:
All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st
Press”).
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry
Key Fob In Vehicle:
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature which
will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door
panel switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all
open doors have been closed the vehicle
checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for
any valid Passive Entry key fobs. If one of the
vehicle's Passive Entry key fobs is detected
inside the vehicle, and no other valid Passive
Entry key fobs are detected outside the vehicle,
the Passive Entry system automatically unlocks
all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the
Passive Entry key fob can be locked in the
vehicle).
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger
front door handles, push the door handle lock
button to lock all doors.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the
door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle lock button,
you must wait two seconds before you can
lock or unlock the doors, using either Passive
Entry door handle. This is done to allow you to
check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle, without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is depleted.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using
the key fob lock button or the lock button
located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature
can be enabled or disabled by an authorized
dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see an authorized dealer for service.
Automatic Doors Unlock — If Equipped
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the
vehicle when either front door is opened. This
will occur only after the vehicle has been shifted
into the PARK position after the vehicle has
been driven (shifted out of PARK and all doors
closed).
Automatic Doors Unlock Programming — If
Equipped
The Automatic Doors Unlock feature can be
enabled or disabled as follows:
For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen
radio, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen
radio, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
NOTE:
Use the Auto Unlock Doors feature in accor-
dance with local laws.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Child-Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for children
riding in the rear seat, the rear doors (if
equipped) of your vehicle have the
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
To use the system, open each rear door, use a
flat blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and
rotate the dial to engage or disengage the
Child-Protection Door Lock system. When the
system on a door is engaged, that door can only
be opened by using the outside door handle
even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position.
Child Lock Control
NOTE:
After setting the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside
to make certain it is in the desired position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the door lock switch to the unlock posi-
tion, roll down the window and open the door
with the outside door handle.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the rear doors can
only be opened from the outside with the
Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
Manual Front Seat Adjustment
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Both front seats are adjustable forward or
rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle
is located under the seat cushion at the front
edge of each seat.
Manual Seat Adjuster
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle
and slide the seat forward or rearward. Release
the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure
that the seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
The recline lever is located on the outboard side
of the seat. To recline the seat, lean forward
slightly, lift the lever, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the
seatback to its normal upright position, lean
forward and lift the lever. Release the lever
once the seatback is in the upright position
Manual Recline Lever
Dump Feature (Manual Recline Seat Only) —
Standard Cab
Actuating the recliner handle will allow the
seatback to swing (dump) forward on manual
recliner seats. This “dump” feature allows
access to the storage bin behind the seat.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
WARNING!
Do not stand or lean in front of the seat
while actuating the handle. The seatback
may swing forward and hit you causing
injury.
To avoid injury, place your hand on the seat-
back and actuate the handle, then position
the seatback in the desired position.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped
The seat is divided into three segments. The
outboard seat portions are each 40% of the
total width of the seat. On some models, the
back of the center portion (20%) easily folds
down to provide an armrest/center storage
compartment.
Manual Rear Seat Adjustment
Reclining Rear Seats — If Equipped
The recliner handle is located on the outside of
the seat cushion. To adjust the seatback, lift
upward on the handle, lean back on the
seatback and when you reach the desired
position, release the handle.
Rear Seat Recliner Handle
Power Driver Seat Adjustment — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with an
eight-way power driver's seat. The power seat
switches are located on the outboard side of the
driver's seat cushion. There are two power seat
switches that are used to control the movement
of the seat cushion and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward. Push the seat switch forward or
rearward. The seat will move in the direction of
the switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the
rear of the switch, the seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position has been reached.
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
top of the seatback. This could impair
visibility or become a dangerous projectile in
a sudden stop or collision.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Seatback Switch
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
(Continued)
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted
in four directions. Pull upward or push
downward on the front or rear of the seat
switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted
forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch
forward or rearward, the seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position is reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or
passenger seats may also be equipped with
power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is
located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar
support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support.
Lumbar Control Switch
Power Passenger Seat Adjustment — If
Equipped
Some models are equipped with a six-way
power passenger seat. The power seat switch is
located on the outboard side of the seat. The
switch is used to control the movement of the
seat and seat cushion.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward. Push the seat switch forward or
rearward. The seat will move in the direction of
the switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat’s path.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the
rear of the switch, the seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted
in four directions. Pull upward or push
downward on the front or rear of the seat
switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may
be equipped with heaters located in the seat
cushions and seatbacks.
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control buttons are
located on the center instrument panel below
the climate controls.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen,
the front heated seats control buttons are also
located within the climate or controls screen of
the touchscreen.
Press the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Press the heated seat button a second
time to turn the LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time
to turn the heating elements off.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater
will provide a boosted heat level during the first
four minutes of operation. Then, the heat
output will drop to the normal HI-level. If the
HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous
operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn off automatically after
approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the driver’s seat can be programmed to come
on during a remote start.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen,
this feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a
touchscreen, this feature can be programmed
through the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the two outboard seats are
equipped with heated seats. The heated seat
switches for these seats are located on the rear
of the center console.
There are two heated seat switches that allow
the rear passengers to operate the seats
independently. You can choose from HI, LO or
OFF heat settings. Amber indicator lights in
each switch indicate the level of heat in use.
Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
LO and none for OFF.
Push the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Push the heated seat button a second
time to turn the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a third time
to turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater
will provide a boosted heat level during the first
four minutes of operation. Then, the heat
output will drop to the normal HI-level. If the
HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous
operation. At that time, the number of
illuminated LEDs changes from two to one,
indicating the change. The LO-level setting will
turn off automatically after approximately
45 minutes.
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion are small fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment,
and move air through fine perforations in the
seat cover to help keep the driver and front
passenger cooler in higher ambient
temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds,
HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are
located on the center instrument panel below
the climate controls.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen,
the front ventilated seats control buttons are
also located within the climate or controls
screen of the touchscreen.
Press the ventilated seat button once to
choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat button a second
time to choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat button a third
time to turn the ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the ventilated seats can be programmed to
come on during a remote start.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen,
this feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a
touchscreen, this feature can be programmed
through the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers (Regular Cab
Models)
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery
bag handles are built into the back panel of the
cab, behind the rear seat.
Grocery Bag Hooks
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
Front Head Restraint Adjustment
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button located on the
base of the head restraint and push downward
on the head restraint.
Release/Adjustment Buttons
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING! (Continued)
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint
180 degrees to the incorrect position in an
attempt to gain additional clearance to the back
of the head.
Rear Head Restraint Adjustment
The rear seats are equipped with adjustable
and removable head restraints. To raise the
head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the
adjustment button located on the base of the
head restraint and push downward on the head
restraint.
Release/Adjustment Buttons
NOTE:
The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab and
Quad Cab) has only one adjustment position
that is used to aid in the routing of a tether.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Do not reposition the head restraint
180 degrees to the incorrect position in an
attempt to gain additional clearance to the
back of the head.
Front Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint, raise it up as far
as it can go. Then, push the adjustment button
and the release button at the base of each post
while pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall
the head restraint, put the head restraint posts
into the holes. Then, adjust it to the appropriate
height.
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint
180 degrees to the incorrect position in an
attempt to gain additional clearance to the back
of the head.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint, push the
adjustment button and the release button while
pulling upward on the whole assembly. To
reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and adjust it to the
appropriate height.
NOTE:
To remove outboard restraints, the rear seat
bottom must be folded up.
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. The tilt lever is
located on the steering column, below the
multifunction lever.
Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to
unlock the steering column. With one hand
firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering
column up or down, as desired. Release the
lever to lock the steering column firmly in place.
Tilt Steering Lever Location
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will operate for an
average of 80 minutes before automatically
shutting off. This time may vary based on the
temperature of the surrounding environment or
the heated steering wheel may not turn on
when it is already warm.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
The heated steering wheel control button is
located on the center instrument panel below
the climate controls. There are also buttons
located within the climate or controls screen of
the touchscreen.
Press the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the heated steering wheel can be programmed
to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF
EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to
allow a greater range of driver comfort for
steering wheel tilt and seat position. This
feature allows the brake and accelerator pedals
to move toward or away from the driver to
provide improved position with the steering
wheel.
The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left
side of the steering column.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition
OFF.
The pedals cannot be adjusted when the
vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Speed
Control system is on. The following messages
will appear on vehicles equipped with an
instrument cluster display if the pedals are
attempted to be adjusted when the system is
locked out: “Adjustable Pedal Disabled —
Cruise Control Engaged” or “Adjustable Pedal
Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys-
ical conditions must exercise care when
using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
and material. This may cause the steering
wheel heater to overheat.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Always adjust the pedals to a position that
allows full pedal travel.
Further small adjustments may be necessary
to find the best possible seat/pedal position.
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right for various drivers. The mirror should
be adjusted to center on the view through the
rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of
the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position
(toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right for various drivers. The mirror should
be adjusted to center on the view through the
rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear
view viewing.
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned
on or off through the touchscreen.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is
moving. You could lose control and have an
accident. Always adjust the pedals while the
vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable
pedals or impede its ability to move, as it may
cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal
travel may become limited if movement is
stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable
pedal's path.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View
Camera Display — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the
vehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed
position at the windshield. The mirror installs on
the windshield button with a counterclockwise
rotation and requires no tools for mounting. The
mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear
window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
When the vehicle is placed in REVERSE, a video
display illuminates to display the image
generated by the rear view camera located on
the tailgate handle. The auto dimming feature is
also disabled to improve rear view viewing.
Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside
mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic
with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated
approach lights under the outside mirrors, they
can be turned off through the instrument
cluster display or the Uconnect display. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the
passenger side convex mirror will look smaller
and farther away than they really are. Relying
too much on your passenger side convex
mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex
passenger side mirror.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Driver's Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
— If Equipped
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically
adjust for glare from vehicles behind you. This
feature is controlled by the inside Automatic
Dimming mirror and will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The controls for the power mirrors are located
on the driver's door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror
select buttons and a four-way mirror control
switch.
Power Mirror Controls
To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R
(right) button to select the mirror that you want
to adjust.
Using the four-way mirror control switch, push
on any of the four arrows for the direction that
you want the mirror to move.
Power Mirror Movement
Power Folding Outside Mirrors For Standard
And Trailer Tow — If Equipped
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can
be electrically folded rearward and unfolded
into the drive position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is
located between the power mirror switches L
(left) and R (right). Push the switch once and the
mirrors will fold in, push the switch a second
time and the mirrors will return to the normal
driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically
cycled, a potential extra button push is required
to get the mirrors back to the home position. If
the mirror does not electrically fold, check for
ice or dirt build up at the pivot area which can
cause excessive drag.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Select Buttons
2 — Four-Way Mirror Control Switch
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors
if the following occurs:
The mirrors are accidentally blocked while
folding.
The mirrors are accidentally manually
folded/unfolded.
The mirrors come out of the unfolded
position.
The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal
driving speeds.
To Reset The Power Folding Mirrors:
1. Using the power folding mirror switch,
move the mirror to its full forward position.
2. Using the power folding mirror switch, move
the mirror to the full retract position (this
may require multiple button pushes). This
resets them to their normal position.
NOTE:
The power fold mirrors are designed to
operate while the vehicle is stationary or trav-
eling at moderate speeds. If you attempt to
power fold the mirrors at high speeds they
may not fully open or close. You should slow
down to a moderate speed and complete the
operation.
When pushing the power fold button 10 or
more times in one minute the system shuts
down for one minute to protect the motors
from over heating.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are designed to be able to be
manually folded both forward and rearward to
prevent damage.
Folding Mirror
CAUTION!
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the
full rearward position to resist damage when
entering a car wash or a narrow location.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable
mirror head to provide a greater vision range
when towing extra-wide loads. To change
position inboard or outboard, the mirror head
should be rotated (flipped in or out).
Trailer Towing Position
NOTE:
Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to
entering an automated car wash.
A small blindspot mirror is located next to main
mirror and can be adjusted separately.
Blindspot Mirror
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost
or ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped).
Refer to “Climate Controls” in this chapter for
further information.
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic
outside mirror positioning which will aid the
driver’s view of the ground rearward of the front
doors. The outside mirrors will move slightly
downward from the present position when the
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE.
The outside mirrors will then return to the
original position when the vehicle is shifted out
of the REVERSE position.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature is not
turned on when delivered from the factory.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped
Illuminated vanity mirrors are located on each
sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor
down and swing the mirror cover upward. The
lights will turn on automatically. Closing the
mirror cover turns off the light.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — If
Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for
additional flexibility in positioning the visor to
block out the sun.
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature, rotate the
sun visor downward and unclip it. Pull the sun
visor along the “Slide-On-Rod” until the sun
visor is in the desired position.
“Slide-On-Rod” Extender
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left
side of the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side
of the instrument panel, next to the steering
wheel. The headlight switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
instrument panel lights, cargo lights and fog
lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight
and fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter
and less susceptible to stone breakage than
glass lights. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as
glass and therefore different lens cleaning
procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated
approach lights under the outside mirrors they
can be turned off through the instrument
cluster display or the Uconnect radio. For
further information refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” and “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia”.
Headlights
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise to the headlight position.
When the headlight switch is on, the parking
lights, taillights, license plate light and
instrument panel lights are also turned on. To
turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (off) position.
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If
Equipped
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate
when the engine is started and the
transmission is in any gear except PARK. This
provides a constant "lights on" condition until
the ignition is placed in the OFF position. The
lights illuminate at less than half of normal
intensity. If the parking brake is applied, the
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will turn off.
Also, if a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp
on the same side of the vehicle may turn off for
the duration of the turn signal activation. Once
the turn signal is no longer active, the DRL lamp
will illuminate.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the
instrument panel to switch the headlights to
high beam. Pulling the multifunction lever back
toward the steering wheel will turn the low
beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at
night by automating high beam control through
the use of a digital camera mounted on the
inside rearview mirror. This camera detects
vehicle specific light and automatically switches
from high beams to low beams until the
approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off by selecting “ON”
under “Auto Dim High Beams” within your
Uconnect settings, as well as turning the
headlight switch to the AUTO position. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer
to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other
obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function
improperly.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other abrasive
materials to clean the lenses.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
To opt out of the Advanced Automatic High
Beam Sensitivity Control (default) and enter
Reduced High Beam Sensitivity Control (not
recommended), toggle the high beam lever
six full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of
placing the ignition in the ON position. The
system will return to the default setting when
the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam
Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror
must be re-aimed to ensure proper
performance. See a local authorized dealer.
To Activate
1. The Automatic High Beams are enabled
through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
2. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO
headlight position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you
(toward front of vehicle) to engage the high
beam mode.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beams will not activate until
the vehicle is at or above 12 mph (20 km/h).
To Deactivate
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or
rearward in vehicle) to manually deactivate
the system (normal operation of low
beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to
reactivate the system.
The Automatic High Beams can also be
deactivated through the Uconnect system.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction
lever toward you. This will cause the high beam
headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the
lever is released.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights
on or off according to ambient light levels. To
turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch
counterclockwise to the AUTO position. When
the system is on, the headlight time delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you
place the ignition into the OFF position.
The headlight time delay can be programmed
0/30/60/90 seconds. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
To turn the automatic system off, move the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the head-
lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and
instrument panel lights, rotate the
headlight switch clockwise. To turn off
the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch
back to the O (off) position.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will
turn on approximately 10 seconds after the
wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the
headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off, if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE:
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with
a headlight delay that will leave the headlights
on for up to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated
when the ignition is turned off while the
headlight switch is on, and then the headlight
switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can be
canceled by either turning the headlight switch
on then off, or by placing the ignition in the ON/
RUN position.
NOTE:
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights
are left on after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position, a chime will sound when the driver’s
door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the
headlight switch to the parking light or headlight
position and pushing in the headlight rotary
control.
Fog Light Switch
The fog lights will operate only when the parking
lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are
on low beam. An indicator light located in the
instrument cluster display will illuminate when
the fog lights are on. The fog lights will turn off
when the switch is pushed a second time, when
the headlight switch is rotated to the off
position, or the high beam is selected.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster display will flash to show proper
operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defec-
tive outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to
light when the lever is moved, it would suggest
that the indicator bulb is defective.
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal (right or left) will flash three times then
automatically turn off.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Cargo Light With Bed Lights — If Equipped
The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) are
turned on by pushing the cargo lights button
located just below the headlight switch.
Cargo/Bed Lights Button On Headlight Switch
If the vehicle’s speed is 0 mph (0 km/h), these
lights can also be turned on using the switch
located just inside the pickup box. A telltale will
illuminate in the instrument cluster display
when these lights are on. Pushing the switch a
second time will turn the lights off.
NOTE:
The cargo light will automatically turn off if the
vehicle is shifted into NEUTRAL or DRIVE, and
will turn back on when the vehicle is shifted into
PARK or REVERSE. The bed lights are not
affected by gear selection.
Bed Light Switch Without RamBox
Bed Light Switch With RamBox
The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) will
turn on for approximately 60 seconds when a
key fob unlock button is pushed, as part of the
Illuminated Entry feature.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load
shedding is provided for both the interior and
exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for
10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all
the way up to the dome on position for
10 minutes, the interior lights will automatically
turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is
ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, the exterior lights will
automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the
headlights are turned on and left on for eight
minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when
the front doors are opened, when the dimmer
control (rotating wheel on the bottom of the
switch) is rotated to the far right detent position.
If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE), and the unlock button is pushed on
the key fob, the courtesy and dome lights will
turn on.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Both lights in the overhead console and rear
passenger compartment will illuminate as
courtesy lights when a door is opened, when the
dimmer control is rotated to the courtesy light
position (full right position), or when the unlock
button is pushed on the Remote Keyless Entry
key fob (if equipped). These lights are also
operated individually as reading lights by
pushing on the corresponding lens.
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
Rear Passenger Courtesy/Reading Light
NOTE:
The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pushed a second time, so be sure
they have been turned off before exiting the
vehicle. If the interior lights are left on after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position, they will
automatically turn off after 15 minutes.
Ambient Light
The overhead console is equipped with an
ambient light feature. This light casts
illumination for improved visibility of the floor
console area.
Ambient Light
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Dimmer Control
The brightness of the instrument panel as well
as the ambient lighting can be regulated by
rotating the dimmer control to the right
(brighter) or to the left (dimmer).
Dimmer Control
Party Mode
When a door is open and the interior lights are
on, rotating the dimmer control all the way left,
to the off detent, will cause all the interior lights
to go out. This is also known as the "Party" mode
because it allows the doors to stay open for
extended periods of time without discharging
the vehicle's battery.
Parade Mode
When the headlights are on you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip
odometer, radio and overhead console by
rotating the control to the right until you hear a
click. This feature is termed the “Parade” mode
and is useful when headlights are required
during the day.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen,
the dimming of the touchscreen is program-
mable through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
details.
Illuminated Approach
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
key fob to unlock the doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting
in the outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to
“Mirrors” in this chapter for further information.
The lights will fade off after approximately
30 seconds, or they will immediately fade off
once the ignition switch is changed to ON/RUN
from the OFF position.
The front courtesy overhead console and door
courtesy lights will not turn off if the dimmer
control is in the “Dome ON” position (rotate
vertical thumb wheel all the way to the top
detent).
The illuminated entry system will not operate if
the dimmer control is in the “Dome OFF”
position (rotate vertical thumb wheel all the way
to the bottom detent).
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated
approach lights under the outside mirrors, they
can be turned off by moving the instrument
panel dimmer into the “Dome Defeat” detent
position.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield Wipers
The wipers and washers are operated by a
switch in the multifunction lever. Turn the end of
the lever to select the desired wiper speed.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first
detent past the intermittent settings for
low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the end of
the lever upward to the second detent past the
intermittent settings for high-speed wiper
operation.
Intermittent Wiper System
The intermittent feature of this system was
designed for use when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable
pause between cycles, desirable. For maximum
delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
upward to the first detent.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the
knob until it enters the low continual speed
position. The delay can be regulated from a
maximum of about 18 seconds between cycles,
to a cycle every one second. The delay intervals
will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer
knob, located on the end of the multifunction
lever, inward to the second detent. Washer fluid
will be sprayed and the wiper will operate for
two to three cycles after the washer knob is
released from this position.
If the washer knob is depressed while in the
delay range, the wiper will operate for several
seconds after the washer knob is released. It
will then resume the intermittent interval
previously selected. If the washer knob is
pushed while in the off position, the wiper will
turn on and cycle approximately three times
after the wash knob is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
range of your climate. This rating information
can be found on most washer fluid containers.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the
windshield could lead to a collision. You might
not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To
avoid sudden icing of the windshield during
freezing weather, warm the windshield with
the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
Mist Feature
When a single wipe to clear off road mist or
spray from a passing vehicle is needed, push
the washer knob, located on the end of the
multifunction lever, inward to the first detent
and release. The wipers will cycle one time and
automatically shut off.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed
on the windshield. The wash function must be
used in order to spray the windshield with
washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield
and automatically activates the wipers for the
driver. This feature is especially useful for road
splash or overspray from the windshield
washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of
the multifunction lever to one of five settings to
activate this feature.
NOTE:
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted
with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay
position 1 is the least sensitive, and wiper delay
position 5 is the most sensitive. Position 3
should be used for normal rain conditions.
Positions 1 and 2 can be used if the driver
desires less wiper sensitivity. Positions 4 and 5
can be used if the driver desires more
sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the O (off)
position when not using the system.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
when the wiper switch is in the low or
high-speed position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function
properly when ice, or dried salt water is
present on the windshield.
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or
silicone may reduce Rain Sensing
performance.
The Rain Sensing system has protection
features for the wiper blades and arms, and will
not operate under the following conditions:
Low Ambient Temperature — When the igni-
tion is first placed in the ON position, the Rain
Sensing system will not operate until the
wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside
temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When
the ignition is ON, and the transmission is in
the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing
system will not operate until the wiper switch
is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
5 mph (8 km/h), or the gear selector is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the
operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the RUN position, Rain
Sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has
been selected, and no other inhibit
conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to
regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction
of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The
controls are located on the touchscreen (if
equipped) and on the instrument panel below
the radio.
Manual Climate Control Overview
Manual Climate Controls Without A Touchscreen
Icon Description
MAX A/C Setting
Set the Temperature Control Knob to the MAX A/C setting to change the current setting to the coldest output of air.
Moving the temperature control knob away from the MAX A/C setting causes the MAX A/C operation to exit.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator illuminates when the A/C is on.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the system between
Recirculation mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pushed. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without
disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and
window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Temperature Control
Temperature Control regulates the temperature of the air forced through the Climate Control system. The temperature
increases as you turn the temperature control knob clockwise. The temperature decreases as you turn the temperature
control knob counterclockwise.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air forced through the Climate Control system. There are seven blower speeds
available. The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Icon Description
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Mode Control:
Turn the Mode Control knob to adjust the airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes
from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of
air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the
floor outlets.
Floor Mode Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Icon Description
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
Mix Mode Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Front Defrost Setting
Turn the Mode Control knob to the Front Defrost mode setting. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature
settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 15 minutes.
Climate Control OFF
To turn the Climate Controls off, turn the Blower Control knob to the OFF (o) position.
Icon Description
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With Manual Temperature Controls
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on the touchscreen to change the current setting to the coldest output of air.
The MAX A/C indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate to change the current setting.
The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the system between
Recirculation mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes except Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on
the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change
the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from
the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use
Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When
toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to the previous setting.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to turn on
the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the
rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 15 minutes.
Temperature Control
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards
the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator illuminates when SYNC is
on. SYNC synchronizes the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s
temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
Icon Description
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Faceplate Blower Knob
Touchscreen Blower
Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available.
Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using either
the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower
setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode buttons on the touchscreen to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets, and demist
outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Selecting this mode from the touchscreen causes air to flow from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets
can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved
up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or
adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode
Selecting this mode from the touchscreen causes air to flow from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the
floor outlets.
Icon Description
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Floor Mode Floor Mode
Selecting this mode from the touchscreen causes air to flow from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through
the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Selecting this mode from the touchscreen causes air to flow through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets.
This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Faceplate OFF Button
Touchscreen OFF
Button
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on the touchscreen, or push the OFF button on the faceplate to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
Icon Description
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Automatic Climate Control Overview
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display With Automatic Temperature Controls
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With Automatic Temperature Controls
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
NOTE:
Icons and descriptions can vary based upon vehicle equipment.
Icon Description
MAX A/C
Press and release the MAX A/C button on the touchscreen to change the current setting to the coldest output of air.
The MAX A/C indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change the current
setting. The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation
indicator illuminates when Recirculation is on. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors,
dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the
touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Faceplate AUTO Button
Touchscreen AUTO
Button
AUTO Button
Set your desired temperature and press AUTO. AUTO will achieve and maintain your desired temperature by automatically
adjusting the blower speed and air distribution. AUTO mode is highly recommended for efficiency. You can press and
release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to turn AUTO on. The AUTO indicator
illuminates when AUTO is on. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic
modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change
the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from
the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use
Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When
toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to turn on
the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The indicator illuminates when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 15 minutes.
Icon Description
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Uconnect 3
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
Driver and Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the up arrow button on the faceplate, press
the up arrow button on the touchscreen, or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the
touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the down arrow button on the faceplate, press the down arrow button
on the touchscreen, or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings. When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s temperature will move up and down with the
driver’s temperature, when it is increased and decreased, respectively.
NOTE:
Temperature numbers will only be displayed if the system is equipped with Automatic Temperature Control.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator illuminates when SYNC is
on. SYNC synchronizes the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s
temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
Icon Description
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Faceplate Blower Knob
Touchscreen Blower
Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available.
The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower
setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode buttons on the touchscreen to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets, and demist
outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of
air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the
floor outlets.
Icon Description
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
Floor Mode Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Faceplate OFF Button
Touchscreen OFF
Button
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control system ON/OFF.
Icon Description
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or
the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like
the system to maintain by adjusting the
driver and passenger temperature control
buttons. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and
automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort
as quickly as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or
Metric units by selecting the U.S./Metric
customer-programmable feature. Refer to
the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The blower will increase in speed
and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system
is being used in the manual mode.
Operating Tips
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and
defroster performance, make sure the engine
cooling system is functioning properly and the
proper amount, type, and concentration of
coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation
mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the Air Conditioning (A/C) system at idle for
about five minutes, in fresh air with the blower
setting on high. This will ensure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of
compressor damage when the system is started
again.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions,
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized
dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to
have it replaced when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control
to , on, and
blower on high. Roll
down the windows for
a minute to flush out
the hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn on and set
the mode control to
the position.
Cool Sunny
Operate in
position.
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control
to and turn on
to keep windows
clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control
to the position. If
windshield fogging
starts to occur, move
the control to the
position.
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
Power Windows — If Equipped
Power Window Switches
The power window controls located on the
driver's door trim panel have up-down switches
that give you fingertip control of all power
windows. There is a single opening and closing
switch on the front passenger door and the rear
doors for passenger window controls. The
windows will operate when the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in
the OFF position or until a front door is opened.
NOTE:
The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the
power windows to operate for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
This feature is cancelled when either front door
is opened.
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window
switch have an Auto-Down feature. Push the
window switch past the first detent, release,
and the window will go down automatically. To
cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the
switch in either the up or down direction and
release the switch.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the
switch briefly.
To open the window part way, push the switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
(4-Door Models Driver And Front Passenger
Door Only) — If Equipped
Pull the window switch fully upward to the
second detent, release, and the window will go
up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch to the first detent and release when you
want the window to stop.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped
by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may
result in serious injury or death.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
NOTE:
If the window runs into any obstacle during the
Auto-Closure, it will reverse direction and then
go back down. Remove the obstacle and use
the window switch again to close the window.
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly
during Auto-Closure. If this happens, pull the
switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close
the window manually.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the
window completely and continue to hold the
switch up for an additional two seconds
after the window is closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the
second detent to open the window
completely and continue to hold the switch
down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch (4–Door Models
Only)
The window lockout switch on the driver's door
allows you to disable the window control on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window
controls on the rear passenger doors, push the
window lock switch into the latched or down
position. To enable the window controls, push
the window lock switch again and return the
switch to the released or up position.
Window Lockout Switch
Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
The switch for the power sliding rear window is
located on the overhead console.
Rear Window Switch
Push the switch to the right to open the glass.
Pull the switch to the left to close the glass.
Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
A locking device in the center of the window
helps to prevent entry from the rear of the
vehicle. Squeeze the lock to release the
window.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all
objects from the window before closing.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the
perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open,
open the front and rear windows together to
minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located on the
overhead console between the courtesy/
reading lights.
Power Sunroof Switch
Opening Sunroof
Express Open
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second, the sunroof and sunshade will
open automatically and stop at the full open
position. During Express Open operation, any
other actuation of the sunroof switches will stop
the sunroof in a partially open position.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. Do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project through
the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Manual Open
Push and hold the switch rearward, the sunroof
and sunshade will open and automatically stop
at the full open position. Releasing the switch
while the sunroof is in motion will stop the
sunroof in a partially open position.
Vent Open
Push and release the Vent switch within one
half second and the sunroof will open to the
vent position. During Express Vent operation,
any other actuation of the sunroof switches will
stop the sunroof operation.
Closing Sunroof
Express Close
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position. During Express
Close operation, any other actuation of the
sunroof switches will stop the sunroof in a
partially open position.
Manual Close
Push and hold the switch forward and the
sunroof will close from any position and stop at
the full closed position. Releasing the switch
while the sunroof is in motion will stop sunroof
in a partially open position.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the
perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open,
then open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually.
However, the sunshade will open automatically
as the sunroof opens.
NOTE:
The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
closing of the sunroof during the Express Close
operation.
If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is
detected, the sunroof will automatically retract.
Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts
result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect
will disable and the sunroof must be closed in
Manual Mode.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
to clean the glass panel. Periodically check for
and clear out any debris that may have
collected in the tracks.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for
up to approximately 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HOOD
To Open The Hood
To open the hood, two latches must be
released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located below
the steering wheel at the base of the
instrument panel.
Hood Release
2. Reach into the opening beneath the center
of the hood and push the safety latch lever
to the left to release it, before raising the
hood.
Safety Latch Location
To Close The Hood
Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) from the engine compartment and drop
it. Make sure that the hood is completely
closed.
TAILGATE
Opening
To open the tailgate, lift up on the handle and
pull the tailgate down.
Closing
To close the tailgate, push it upward until both
sides are latched.
NOTE:
Pull back on the tailgate firmly after closing to
ensure it is securely latched.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
motion and block your vision. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at
the front center of the hood to ensure that
both latches engage.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting
or home security systems. The HomeLink® unit
is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console designate the three different
HomeLink® channels.
HomeLink® Buttons
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
NOTE:
Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by federal safety standards. This
includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage
door opener without these safety features.
Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
Internet at HomeLink.com for safety informa-
tion or assistance.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is
recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
To erase the channels place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position and push and hold the two
outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up to
20 seconds. The instrument cluster display will
display “CLEARING CHANNELS.” Release the
buttons when “CHANNELS CLEARED” appears
on the display.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are training the universal
transceiver. Do not train the transceiver if
people, pets or other objects are in the path
of the door or gate. Only use this trans-
ceiver with a garage door opener that has a
“stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufac-
tured after 1982. Do not use a garage door
opener without these safety features.
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide,
a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in
the garage while training the transceiver.
Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or
death.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position with the engine on. Make sure while
programming HomeLink® with the engine on
that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or
that the garage door remains open at all
times.
Erasing all channels should only be
performed when programming HomeLink®
for the first time. Do not erase channels when
programming additional buttons.
If you have any problems, or require assis-
tance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for infor-
mation or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that
were manufactured after 1995. These garage
door openers can be identified by the “LEARN”
or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging
antenna is attached to the garage door opener.
It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the ON/RUN position with
the engine on. Make sure while programming
HomeLink® with the engine on that your vehicle
is outside of your garage, or that the garage
door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold
the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons until the
instrument cluster display changes from
“CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHANNEL #
TRAINED,” then release both buttons.
NOTE:
It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in
some cases for the channel to train.
If “DID NOT TRAIN” appears in the instru-
ment cluster display, repeat from Step 2.
5. On the garage door opener (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button.
This can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the
garage door opener/device motor. Firmly
push and release the “LEARN” or
“TRAINING” button. On some garage door
openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/device
is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the
next step after the LEARN button has been
pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button twice
(holding the button for two seconds each
time). The instrument cluster display will
show “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.” If the
garage door opener/device activates,
programming is complete.
NOTE:
If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
vate, push the button a third time (for two
seconds) to complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remain-
ing button. DO NOT erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been
previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Programming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers
manufactured before 1995.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold
the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons until the
instrument cluster display changes from
“CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHANNEL #
TRAINED,” then release both buttons.
NOTE:
It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in
some cases for the channel to train.
If the instrument cluster display shows
“DID NOT TRAIN”, repeat from Step 2.
5. Push and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button. The instrument cluster
display will display “CHANNEL #
TRANSMIT.” If the garage door
opener/device activates, programming is
complete.
To program the remaining two HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remain-
ing button. DO NOT erase the channels.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been
previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Programming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2
and follow all remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/
United States that require the transmitter
signals to “time-out” after several seconds of
transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission – which may
not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up
the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate
operators are designed to time-out in the same
manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating
of the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the
engine on. For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, place the ignition in the RUN posi-
tion with the engine on. Make sure while
programming HomeLink® with the engine on
that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or
that the garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button while
you push and release (“cycle”), your
hand-held transmitter every two seconds.
4. Continue to hold both buttons until the
instrument cluster display changes from
“CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHANNEL #
TRAINED,” then release both buttons.
NOTE:
It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in
some cases for the channel to train.
If the instrument cluster display shows
“DID NOT TRAIN”, repeat from Step 2.
5. Push and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button. The instrument cluster
display will display “CHANNEL #
TRANSMIT.” If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If you unplugged the garage door
opener/device for programming, plug it back in
at this time.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
(Continued)
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been
previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the
engine on. For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, place the ignition in the RUN posi-
tion with the engine on. Make sure while
programming HomeLink® with the engine on
that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or
that the garage door remains open at all times.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the instrument cluster display
shows “CHANNEL # TRAINING” Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming”
Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink®
To operate, push and release the programmed
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for
the programmed device (i.e. garage door
opener, gate operator, security system, entry
door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell
or turn in your vehicle.
To erase the channels, press and hold the two
outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up to
20 seconds. The instrument cluster display will
display “CLEARING CHANNELS.” Release the
buttons when the instrument cluster display
shows “CHANNELS CLEARED.”
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is
disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is
active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming
HomeLink®, here are some of the most
common solutions:
Replace the battery in the garage door
opener hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door
opener to complete the training for a rolling
code.
Did you unplug the device for programming
and remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
Internet at HomeLink.com for information or
assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide,
a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in
the garage while programming the trans-
ceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious
injury or death.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Storage
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel and
features both an upper and lower storage area.
Glove Compartment
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people, pets or other objects
are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This
includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety
features.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Upper Glove Compartment
2 — Lower Glove Compartment
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
To open the upper glove compartment, push
upward on the handle release. The glove
compartment door will automatically open.
Upper Glove Compartment
To open the lower glove compartment, pull the
release handle.
Lower Glove Compartment
Door Storage
Front Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage areas and bottle holders (driver’s
side only) are located in the door trim panels.
Front Door Storage
Rear Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage compartments are located in both the
driver and passenger rear door trim panels.
Rear Door Storage
Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped
The center storage compartment is located
between the driver and passenger seats. The
storage compartment provides an armrest and
contains both an upper and lower storage area.
Center Storage Compartment
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Pull on the upper handle on the front of the
armrest to raise the cover. The upper storage
area contains a USB power outlet that can be
used to power small electrical devices, refer to
“Electrical Power Outlets” in this section for
further information.
Upper Storage Compartment
With the upper lid closed, pull on the lower
handle to open the lower storage bin.
Lower Storage Bin
The center console is equipped with a front
storage bin located next to the cupholders. This
storage bin may be equipped with a manual
sliding top door.
Front Storage Bin With Door — If Equipped
WARNING!
This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated
on the armrest could be seriously injured
during vehicle operation, or a collision. Only
use the center seating position when the
armrest is fully upright.
In a collision, the latch may open if the total
weight of the items stored exceeds about
10 lbs (4.5 kg). These items could be
thrown about endangering occupants of
the vehicle. Items stored should not exceed
a total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
Seatback Storage
Located in the back of both the driver and
passenger front seats are pockets that can be
used for storage.
Driver’s Side Seatback Storage
Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin — If
Equipped
In-floor storage bins are located in front of the
second row seats and can be used for extra
storage. The storage bins have removable liners
that can be easily removed for cleaning.
In-Floor Storage Bin And Latch
To open in-floor storage bin, lift upward on the
handle of the latch and open the lid.
NOTE:
The front seat may have to be moved forward to
fully open the lid.
Opened Storage Bin
Storage Bin (Regular Cab)
The storage bin is located behind the front
seats and runs the length of the cab.
Storage Bin
Fold Flat Load Floor — If Equipped
Quad Cab and Crew Cab models with a 60/40
rear seat may be equipped with a folding load
floor.
WARNING!
Do not operate the vehicle with loose items
stored on the load floor. While driving or in an
accident you may experience abrupt stopping,
rapid acceleration, or sharp turns. Loose
objects stored on the load floor may move
around with force and strike occupants,
resulting in serious or fatal injury.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Unfolding The Load Floor/Quad Cab
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the
upward position.
Unfolding The Load Floor
2. Grasp the knob on the load floor and lift the
knob until the load floor unfolds into
position.
Load Floor In Open Position
3. Reverse the procedure to store the load
floor.
Unfolding The Load Floor/Crew Cab
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the
upward position.
Load Floor Legs In Stowed Position
2. Unfold both the legs using the straps.
Load Floor Legs In Opened Position
3. Lift the front panel until the load floor
unfolds into position.
Load Floor In Open Position
4. Reverse the procedure to store the load
floor.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
(Continued)
Positioning The Load Floor For Storage Access
Under The Seat
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the
upward position.
2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either
side of the load floor.
3. Lift the load floor up to access storage
under the load floor.
Load Floor Securing Straps/Crew Cab
4. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor
back in the secured down position before
you operate the vehicle.
Below Rear Seat Storage
(Crew Cab/Quad Cab)
The Crew Cab and Quad Cab models provide
additional storage under the rear seats. Lift the
seats to access the storage compartment.
To open the storage compartments, unsnap the
securing snap located at either side of the load
floor and lift upward on the fold flat lid.
Crew Cab Storage
NOTE:
For more information on storage and the fold
flat floor, refer to “Fold Flat Load Floor” in this
section.
Electrical Power Outlets
The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets
can provide power for in-cab accessories
designed for use with the standard “cigar
lighter” plug. The 12 Volt power outlets and
USB Port (Charge Only) have a cap attached to
the outlet indicating “12V DC,” together with
either a key symbol, battery symbol, or USB
symbol.
A key symbol indicates that the ignition must be
in the ON/RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to
provide power. The battery symbol indicates
that the outlet is connected to the battery, and
can provide power at all times.
WARNING!
Do not drive with the load floor in the up
position. When stopping fast or in an
accident, the load floor could move to the
down position causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum power of
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
160 Watts (13 Amps) power rating is
exceeded, the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The auxiliary power outlets can be found in the
following locations:
Lower left and lower right of the center stack
when equipped with a bench seat.
Power Outlets — Center Stack
Center console when equipped with bucket
seats.
Power Outlet — Center Console
Rear of the center console storage compart-
ment — Quad Cab or Crew Cab.
Power Outlet — Rear Center Console
Power Outlet — Rear Center Console Fuse
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of
the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
1 — Power Outlet
2 — USB Port (Charge Only)
CAUTION! (Continued)
1 — F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center
Console Bin / USB Port (Charge Only)
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Rear
Center Console
3 — F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instru-
ment Panel
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
When the vehicle is turned off, be sure to
unplug any equipment as to not drain the
battery of the vehicle. All accessories connected
to the outlet(s) should be removed or turned off
when the vehicle is not in use to protect the
battery against discharge.
Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver — If
Equipped
A removable cigar lighter and ash receiver are
available. For vehicles with a bench seat, the
cup holder tray can be used to hold the ash
receiver.
Power Inverter — If Equipped
A 115 or 230 Volt (150 Watts Maximum) outlet
is located on the center stack of the instrument
panel, to the right of the radio. This outlet can
power cellular phones, electronics and other
low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video game
consoles will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter will
automatically shut down. Once the electrical
device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset.
Power Inverter Outlet
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will
discharge the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accesso-
ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being
started (with accessories still plugged in),
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the
device. The outlet automatically turns off when
the device is unplugged.
NOTE:
The power inverter will only turn on if the igni-
tion is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
Due to built-in overload protection, the power
inverter will shut down if the power rating is
exceeded.
Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped
There can be up to five auxiliary switches
located in the lower switch bank of the
instrument panel which can be used to power
various electronic devices and Power Take Off
(PTO) (if equipped). If PTO is equipped, it will
take the place of the fifth auxiliary switch.
Connections to the switches are found under
the hood in the connectors attached to the
auxiliary Power Distribution Center.
You have the ability to configure the
functionality of the auxiliary switches via the
instrument cluster display. All switches can now
be configured for setting the switch type
operation to latching or momentary, power
source of either battery or ignition, and ability to
hold last state across key cycles.
NOTE:
Holding last state conditions are met when
switch type is set to latching and power source
is set to ignition.
For further information on using the auxiliary
switches, please refer to the Ram Body
Builder’s Guide by accessing
www.rambodybuilder.com and choosing the
appropriate links.
PICKUP BOX
The pickup box has many features designed for
utility and convenience.
Pick Up Box Features
NOTE:
If you are installing a toolbox, ladder rack or
headache rack at the front of the pickup box,
you must use Mopar Box Reinforcement
Brackets that are available from an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the
receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
1 — Upper Load Floor Indents
2 — Bulk Head Dividers
3 — Cleats
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
(Continued)
You can carry wide building materials (sheets of
plywood, etc.) by building a raised load floor.
Place lumber across the box in the indentations
provided above the wheel housings and in the
bulkhead dividers to form the floor.
There are stampings in the sheet metal on the
inner side bulkheads of the box in front of and
behind both wheel housings. Place wooden
boards across the box from side to side to
create separate load compartments in the
pickup box.
There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the
lower sides of the pickup box that can sustain
loads up to 1000 lbs (450 kg) total.
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED
The RamBox system is an integrated pickup box
storage and cargo management system
consisting of three features:
Integrated box side storage bins
Cargo extender/divider
Bed rail tie-down system
RamBox Integrated Box Side Storage Bins
Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of
the pickup box. The cargo storage bins provide
watertight, lockable, illuminated storage for up
to 150 lbs (68 kg) of evenly distributed cargo.
RamBox Cargo Storage Bins
WARNING!
The pickup box is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who
should sit in seats and use seat belts.
Care should always be exercised when
operating a vehicle with unrestrained
cargo. Vehicle speeds may need to be
reduced. Severe turns or rough roads may
cause shifting or bouncing of the cargo that
may result in vehicle damage. If wide
building materials are to be frequently
carried, the installation of a support is
recommended. This will restrain the cargo
and transfer the load to the pickup box
floor.
If you wish to carry more than 600 lbs
(272 kg) of material suspended above the
wheelhouse, supports must be installed to
transfer the weight of the load to the pickup
box floor or vehicle damage may result. The
use of proper supports will permit loading
up to the rated payload.
Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward
in an accident causing serious or fatal
injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To open a storage bin with the RamBox
unlocked, push and release the button located
on the lid. The RamBox lid will open upward to
allow hand access. Lift the lid to fully open.
NOTE:
RamBox will not open when the pushbutton is
pushed if the RamBox is locked.
RamBox Pushbutton And Lock
The interior of the RamBox will automatically
illuminate when the lid is opened. In addition to
the automatic illumination switch, there is a
manual on/off switch located at the rear of
each storage bin. Pushing the switch once will
turn off the bin lights, pushing the switch again
will turn the lights back on.
RamBox Light Switch
Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs
(to allow water to drain from bins). To remove
plug, pull up on the edge. To install, push the
plug downward into drain hole.
NOTE:
Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo
dividers and shelf supports. These accessories
(in addition to other RamBox accessories) are
available from Mopar.
Locking And Unlocking RamBox
Push and release the lock or unlock button on
the key fob to lock and unlock all doors, the
tailgate and the RamBox (if equipped). Refer to
“Keys” in this chapter for further information.
The RamBox storage bins can be locked using
the vehicle key. To lock and unlock the storage
bin, insert the key into the keyhole on the push
button and turn clockwise to lock or
counterclockwise to unlock. Always return the
key to the upright (vertical) position before
removing the key from the push button.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the following items could
cause damage to the vehicle:
Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins
is properly secured.
Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 150 lb
(68 kg) per bin for 1500 series vehicles.
CAUTION!
Leaving the lid open for extended periods of
time could cause the vehicle battery to
discharge. If the lid is required to stay open
for extended periods of time, it is
recommended that the bin lights be turned
off manually using the on/off switch.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
RamBox Safety Warning
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent
personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
RamBox Storage Bin Cover Emergency
Release Lever — If Equipped
As a security measure, a Storage Bin Cover
Emergency Release is built into the storage bin
cover latching mechanism.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
NOTE:
In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be
opened from inside of the bin by pulling on the
glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the storage
bin cover latching mechanism.
CAUTION!
Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and
latched before moving or driving the
vehicle.
Loads applied to the top of the bin lid
should be minimized to prevent damage to
the lid and latching/hinging mechanisms.
Damage to the RamBox bin may occur due
to heavy/sharp objects placed in bin that
shift due to vehicle motion. In order to mini-
mize potential for damage, secure all cargo
to prevent movement and protect inside
surfaces of bin from heavy/sharp objects
with appropriate padding.
WARNING!
Always close the storage bin covers when
your vehicle is unattended.
Do not allow children to have access to the
storage bins. Once in the storage bin, young
children may not be able to escape. If
trapped in the storage bin, children can die
from suffocation or heat stroke.
In an accident, serious injury could result if
the storage bin covers are not properly
latched.
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie
down.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Bed Extender — If Equipped
The bed extender has three functional
positions:
Storage Position
Divider Position
Extender Position
Storage Position
The storage position for the bed extender is at
the front of the truck bed which maximizes the
bed cargo area when not in use.
To install the bed extender into the storage
position, perform the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked
using the vehicle key and rotate the center
handle vertically to release the extender
side gates.
Center Handle And Lock
2. With the side gates open, position the
extender fully forward in the bed against the
front panel.
Storage Position
3. Rotate the side gates closed allowing the
outboard ends to be positioned in front of
the cargo tie down loops.
Cargo Tie Down Loop
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to
secure the side gates in the closed position.
Side Gates Closed
1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
5. Lock the center handle using the vehicle
key to secure the panel into place.
Divider Position
The divider position is intended for managing
your cargo and assisting in keeping cargo from
moving around the bed. There are 11 divider
slots along the bed inner panels which allow for
various positions to assist in managing your
cargo.
To install the bed extender into a divider
position, perform the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked
using the vehicle key and rotate the center
handle vertically to release the extender
side gates.
Center Handle And Lock
2. With the side gates open, position the
extender so the outboard ends align with
the intended slots in the sides of the bed.
Aligning Gate To Slots
3. Rotate the side gates closed so that the
outboard ends are secured into the
intended slots of the bed.
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to
secure the side gates in the closed position.
Side Gates Closed
5. Lock the center handle to secure the panel
into place.
Extender Position
The extender position allows you to load the bed
of the truck beyond the tailgate. The bed
extender will add an additional 15 inches
(38 cm) in the back of the truck when additional
cargo room is needed.
1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The extender position utilizes a locating pin and
rotating handle located on both sides of the
truck bed near the tailgate.
Extender Position
To install the bed extender into the extender
position, perform the following:
1. Lower the tailgate.
2. Make sure the center handle is unlocked
and rotate the center handle vertically in
order to release the extender side gates.
3. Fit the end of the side gate ends onto the
pin and handle.
Extender Installation
4. Rotate the handles to the horizontal
position to secure into place.
Locking Tab
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of potential injury or
property damage:
Cargo must be secured.
Do not exceed cargo load rating of your
vehicle.
Secure all loads to truck utilizing cargo tie
downs.
Extender should not be used as cargo tie
down.
When vehicle is in motion do not exceed
150 lbs (68 kg) load on the tailgate.
The bed extender is not intended for off
road use.
When not in use, the extender/divider
should be in stowed or divider position with
the tailgate closed.
When in use all handles are to be in the
locked position.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
Bed Rail Tie-Down System — If Equipped
NOTE:
This feature is available for vehicles both
equipped, or not equipped, with a RamBox.
There are two adjustable cleats on each side of
the bed that can be used to assist in securing
cargo.
Adjustable Cleats
Each cleat must be located and tightened down
in one of the detents, along either rail, in order
to keep cargo properly secure.
To move the cleat to any position on the rail,
turn the nut counterclockwise, approximately
three turns. Then pull out on the cleat and slide
it to the detent nearest the desired location.
Make sure the cleat is seated in the detent and
tighten the nut.
Adjustable Cleat Assembly
Cleat Removal (Standard Box Rail)
To remove the cleats from the utility rail, slide
the cleat forward to access the cut out at the
end of the box rail, then remove the cleat.
Cleat Removal (With Tonneau Cover)
To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove
the end cap screw located in the center of the
end cap, using a #T30 Torx head driver.
Remove the end cap and slide the cleat off the
end of the rail.
End Cap Screw Location If Equipped With
Tonneau Cover
CAUTION!
The maximum load per cleat should not
exceed 250 lbs (113 kg) and the angle of the
load on each cleat should not exceed
45 degrees above horizontal, or damage to
the cleat or cleat rail may occur.
1 — Utility Rail Detent
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Cleat
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cleat Removal (Without Tonneau Cover)
Remove the end cap by pushing upward on the
release button located beneath the end cap
while pulling the cap away from the rail. The
cleat can now be removed by sliding it off the
end of the rail.
End Cap Release Button If Not Equipped With
Tonneau Cover
Pull End Cap Away From Rail
SLIDE-IN CAMPERS
Camper Applications
Certain truck models are not recommended for
slide-in campers. To determine if your vehicle is
excluded, please refer to the “Consumer
Information Truck-Camper Loading” document
available online at ramtrucks.com. For safety
reasons, follow all instructions in this important
document.
NOTE:
When a cap or pickup camper is installed on a
vehicle, an alternate Center High-Mounted Stop
Light (CHMSL) must be provided.
EASY-OFF TAILGATE
To simplify mounting of a camper unit with an
overhang, the tailgate can be removed.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a rear camera or
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), the electrical
connector must be disconnected prior to
removing the tailgate.
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is
deadly, the exhaust system on vehicles
equipped with “Cap or Slide-In Campers”
should extend beyond the overhanging
camper compartment and be free of leaks.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
Disconnecting The Rear Camera Or Remote
Keyless Entry — If Equipped
1. Open the tailgate to access the rear
camera or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
connector bracket located on the rear sill.
Connector Bracket
2. Remove the connector bracket from the sill
by pushing the locking tab in.
Locking Tab
3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness,
ensuring the connector bracket does not
fall into the sill.
4. Connect the chassis plug and bracket
(provided in the glove compartment) to the
chassis wiring harness and insert the
bracket back into the sill.
5. Connect the tailgate plug (provided in the
glove compartment) to the tailgate wiring
harness to ensure that the terminals do not
corrode.
6. Tape the tailgate harness and bracket
against the forward-facing surface of the
tailgate. This will prevent damaging the
connector and bracket when storing or
reinstalling the tailgate.
Removing The Tailgate
1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear
camera and or power locks (if equipped),
refer to “Disconnecting The Rear Camera
Or Remote Keyless Entry — If Equipped” in
this section for further information.
2. Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support
cables by releasing the lock tang from the
pivot.
NOTE:
Make sure tailgate is supported when removing
support cables.
Locking Tang
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Position the tailgate on a 45 degree angle.
4. Raise the right side of the tailgate until the
right side pivot clears the hanger bracket.
5. Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free
the left side pivot.
6. Remove the tailgate from the vehicle.
NOTE:
Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck
pickup box.
Locking Tailgate
The lock is located next to the tailgate handle. If
equipped with remote keyless entry, the tailgate
can be locked using the vehicle key or by locking
the truck with the key fob.
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tri-Fold
Tonneau Cover which consists of different
features:
Easy Tri-Fold cover
Tonneau fore/aft locator
Crossbar inside bed locator
Front and rear clamps
Stowage strap
Locking capability
NOTE:
The Tonneau Cover can be folded up and
secured at the front of the box without removing
it completely.
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Removal
To remove the Tonneau Cover, follow the next
steps:
1. Open the tailgate to gain access to the rear
pair of Tonneau Cover clamps located on
the underside of the cover
(left and right side).
Clamped Position
NOTE:
If clamp wire is damaged replace immediately.
2. Pull both clamp handles down to release
the Tonneau Cover’s rear panel.
Released Position
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is
deadly, the exhaust system on vehicles
equipped with “Cap or Slide-In Campers”
should extend beyond the overhanging
camper compartment and be free of leaks.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
3. From the released position, send the
clamps to the Stowed Position by pushing
from the yellow bumper up. Listen for a
“clicking” sound to confirm the clamp has
been properly stowed.
Stowed Position
4. Fold the rear panel up onto the center panel
(intermediate position).
Folded Rear Panel (Intermediate Position)
NOTE:
The vehicle cannot be driven when the Tonneau
Cover is in this position.
5. Fold the rear and center panels up onto the
front panel (Tri-Folded position).
Tri-Folded Position
NOTE:
When folding the center and rear panels, the
sections MUST be held together to avoid
damage to the cover material.
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together
CAUTION!
Make sure the Tonneau Cover clamp and
clamp wire are in the proper stowed position.
If the clamp and clamp wire are not properly
stowed, damage to the Tonneau Cover
material will result.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Fold the panels gently. It is not recommended to
allow the panels to drop under their own weight.
6. Clip both stowage straps to prevent the
Tonneau Cover panels from unfolding.
Stowage Strap
7. Once on the Tri-Folded position, pull both
front clamp handles down to the Released
Position.
Released Position
8. From the Released Position, send the
clamps to the Stowed Position by pushing
from the yellow bumper up. Listen for a
“clicking” sound to confirm the clamp has
been properly stowed.
Stowed Position
9. With two people, remove the Tonneau
Cover.
NOTE:
Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been folded
completely and that the stowage straps are
engaged before removing.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation
To install the Tonneau Cover follow the following
steps:
1. Position the folded Tonneau Cover on the
truck bed and push the cover forward
against the front of the truck bed. The
Tonneau Cover centers itself when placed
on the vehicle.
2. Pull down on the first set of clamp handles
to release the clamps from the stowed
position.
Stowed Position
3. Push clamp wires up and under the flange
of the box (or flange of the Ram Box rail, if
equipped) to the semi clamped position.
Semi Clamped Position
4. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped
position to properly engage the clamps.
Clamped Position
NOTE:
Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not
improperly attached to the truck bed flange.
Improper Clamp Position
5. Disengage the stowage straps.
6. Unfold the center and rear panels to the
intermediate position.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The vehicle cannot be driven when the Tonneau
Cover is in this position.
Intermediate Position (Vehicle Cannot Be Driven)
NOTE:
When folding the center and rear panels, the
sections MUST be held together to avoid
damage to the cover material.
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together
7. Completely unfold the Tonneau Cover.
Fully Unfolded Position
8. Pull the rear clamp handles down into the
released position.
Stowed Position
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
9. Push clamp wires up and under the flange
of box (or flange of Ram Box rail, if
equipped) to the semi clamped position.
Semi Clamped Position
10. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped
position to properly engage the clamps.
Clamped Position
Improper Clamp Position
NOTE:
Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not
partially clamped to the truck bed flange.
The Tonneau Cover clamps can be locked when
in the clamped position by placing a lock
through the locking hole.
Locking Hole
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning
For proper cleaning of the Tonneau Cover, use
Mopar Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and Mopar
Leather & Vinyl Conditioner/Protectant.
CAUTION!
It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure the
Tonneau Cover is properly installed on the
vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure can
result in detachment of the Tonneau Cover
from the vehicle and/or damage to the
vehicle/Tonneau Cover.
2
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Clusters
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103
Base Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows the instrument cluster
display messages. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in this chapter for further
information.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in
the fuel tank when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points
to the side of the vehicle where
the fuel door is located.
Refer to “Refueling The Vehicle — Gas
Engine” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
5. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within
the normal range indicates that the
engine cooling system is operating satis-
factorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather,
up mountain grades, or when towing a
trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed
the upper limits of the normal operating
range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see the warning under
“Cooling System Pressure Cap” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for further information.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H,” turn the engine off
immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
3
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Premium Instrument Clusters
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105
Premium Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Voltmeter
When the engine is running, the gauge
indicates the electrical system voltage.
The pointer should stay within the normal
range if the battery is charged. If the
pointer moves to either extreme left or
right and remains there during normal
driving, the electrical system should be
serviced.
NOTE:
The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at
various engine temperatures. This cycling oper-
ation is caused by the post-heat cycle of the
intake manifold heater system. The number of
cycles and the length of the cycling operation is
controlled by the engine control module.
Post-heat operation can run for several
minutes, and then the electrical system and
voltmeter needle will stabilize.
3. Oil Pressure Gauge
The pointer should always indicate some
oil pressure when the engine is running.
A continuous high or low reading under
normal driving conditions may indicate a
lubrication system malfunction. Imme-
diate service should be obtained from an
authorized dealer.
4. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
5. Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in
the fuel tank when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points
to the side of the vehicle where
the fuel door is located.
Refer to “Refueling The Vehicle — Gas
Engine” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
6. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows the instrument cluster
display messages. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in this chapter for further
information.
7. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within
the normal range indicates that the
engine cooling system is operating satis-
factorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather,
up mountain grades, or when towing a
trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed
the upper limits of the normal operating
range.
3
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an
instrument cluster display, which offers useful
information to the driver. With the ignition in the
OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your
instrument cluster display is designed to display
important information about your vehicle’s
systems and features. Using a driver interactive
display located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show how the
systems are working and give warnings when
they are not. The steering wheel mounted
controls allow you to scroll through the main
menus and submenus. You can access the
specific information you want and make
selections and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
Base Instrument Cluster Display
Premium Instrument Cluster Display
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see the warning under
“Cooling System Pressure Cap” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for further information.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H,” turn the engine off
immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107
The instrument cluster display menu items may
consist of the following:
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Fuel Economy Info
Trip A
Trip B
Audio
Trailer Tow
Stored Messages
Screen Setup
Vehicle Settings (Not equipped with a
Uconnect touchscreen radio)
The system allows the driver to select
information by pushing the following instrument
cluster display control buttons located on the
left side of the steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow
button to scroll upward through the
main menu items, submenu
screen, and vehicle settings.
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow
button to scroll downward through
the main menu items, submenu
screen, and vehicle settings.
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow
button to access/select the infor-
mation screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item. Push
and hold the RIGHT arrow button for two
seconds to reset displayed/selected features
that can be reset.
Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow
button to access/select the infor-
mation screens, submenu screens
of a main menu item, or to return to
the main menu.
3
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Life Reset
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display in the
instrument cluster display after a single chime
has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator
system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate,
dependent upon your personal driving style.
NOTE:
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster
display controls for the following procedure(s).
Vehicles Equipped With Passive Entry
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu to
“Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right arrow button to
access the ”Vehicle Info” screen, then scroll
up or down to select “Oil Life.”
4. Push and hold the right arrow button to
select “Reset”.
5. Push and release the down arrow button to
select “Yes,” then push and release the
right arrow button to reset the Oil Life to
100%.
6. Push and release the up arrow button to exit
the instrument cluster display screen.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Passive Entry
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, cycle the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu to
“Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right arrow button to
access the “Vehicle Info” screen then scroll
up or down to select “Oil Life.”
4. Push and hold the right arrow button to
select “YES” by pushing the right arrow then
push and release the right arrow button to
select reset of the Oil Life to 100%.
5. Push and release the up arrow button to exit
the instrument cluster display screen.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the Oil Life indicator system
did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
Display Menu Items
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the desired selectable menu icon is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the speedometer menu item is highlighted
in the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the right arrow button to cycle the
display between mph and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Vehicle Info menu item is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the right arrow button to enter the
submenus items of Vehicle Info.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
Follow the directional prompts to access or
reset any of the following Vehicle Info submenu
items:
Tire Pressure
Transmission Temperature (Automatic only)
Oil Temperature
Oil Life
Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
Battery Voltage — If Equipped
Gauge Summary — If Equipped
Engine Hours
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Fuel Economy menu item is highlighted
in the instrument cluster display. Push and Hold
the right arrow button to reset Average Fuel
Economy.
Current Fuel Economy Gauge
Average Fuel Economy Value
Range To Empty
Trip A / Trip B
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Trip menu item is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release
the right arrow button to enter the submenus of
Trip A and Trip B. The Trip A or Trip B information
will display the following:
Distance
Average MPG
Average MPH
Elapsed Time
Push and hold the right arrow button to reset all
information.
Trailer Tow
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Trailer Tow menu item is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the right arrow button and the next
screen will display the following trailer trip
information:
Trip (trailer specific) Distance: Push and hold
the right arrow button to reset the distance.
Trailer Brake
Output
Type
Gain
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Audio display icon is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release
the right arrow button to display the active
source.
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Messages Menu item is highlighted.
This feature shows the number of stored
warning messages. Pushing the right arrow
button will allow you to see what the stored
messages are.
When no messages are present, the main menu
icon will be a closed envelope.
3
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Screen Setup Menu Item
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Screen Setup menu item is highlighted
in the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the right arrow button to enter the
Screen Setup submenu. The Screen Setup
feature allows you to change what information
is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as
the location that information is displayed.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Left
None
Compass (Default Setting)
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty
Average MPG
Current MPG
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip
Trailer Brake Gain
Upper Right
None
Compass
Outside Temp (Default Setting)
Time
Range To Empty
Average MPG
Current MPG
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip
Trailer Brake Gain
Lower Left
None (Default Setting)
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty
Average MPG
Current MPG
Trailer Brake Gain
Lower Right
None (Default Setting)
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty
Average MPG
Current MPG
Trailer Brake Gain
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111
Upper and Lower Gauge
None (Default Setting)
Trans Temp
Oil Temp
Oil Life
Current MPG
Trailer Brake
Odometer
No Decimals (Default Setting)
Decimals
Restore Defaults
Cancel (Default Setting)
Ok
Settings — If Equipped
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and
recall features when the transmission is in
PARK (P).
Push and release the up and down button until
Settings displays in the instrument cluster
display.
Follow the prompts to display and set any of the
following Vehicle Settings.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following
settings.
If equipped with a base radio (Non-Touch-
screen), the Vehicle Settings will be included
in the instrument cluster display.
If equipped with a Touchscreen radio, the
Vehicle Settings will be included in the radio
head unit.
3
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbreviated
(Left Submenu Layer)
Submenus (Right Submenu Layer)
1 Language Select Language
English, Spanish, French, Italian, German, Dutch, Portuguese, Arabic (If
Equipped)
2 Units Units US.; Metric
3 ParkSense ParkSense
Notification — Sound Only; Sound & Display
Front Volume — Low; Medium; High
Rear Volume — Low; Medium; High
4 Tilt Mirror in Reverse Tilt Mirror in R On; Off
5 Rain Sensing Wipers Auto Wipers On; Off
6 Hill Start Assist Hill Start Assist On; Off
7 Headlights Off Delay Lights Off Delay 0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds
8 Illuminated Approach Lights w/ Unlock 0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds
9
Headlights On with
Wipers
Lights w/ Wipers On; Off
10 Automatic Highbeams Auto Highbeams On; Off
11 Flash Lights with Lock Lights w/ Lock On; Off
12 Auto Lock Doors Auto Lock Doors On; Off
13 Auto Unlock Doors Auto Unlock Doors On; Off
14
Sound Horn with
Remote Start
Horn w/ Remote Start On; Off
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113
15
Sound Horn with
Remote Lock
Horn w/ Remote Lock Off; 1st Press; 2nd Press
16
Remote Unlock
Sequence
Remote Unlock Driver Door; All Doors
17
Key Fob Linked to
Memory
Key in Memory On; Off
18 Passive Entry Passive Entry On; Off
19
Remote Start Comfort
System
Remote Start Comfort Off; Remote Start; All starts
20 Easy Exit Seat Easy Exit Seat On; Off
21 Key-off Power Delay
Power Off Delay
Off; 45 seconds; 5 minutes; 10 minutes
22 Commercial Settings Commercial
Aux Switches
Power Take-Off
PIN Setup
NOTE:
If the vehicle’s PIN is forgotten or not known, see an authorized dealer to have
the PIN reset.
23 Trailer Select Trailer Select Trailer 1; Trailer 2; Trailer 3; Trailer 4
24 Brake Type Brake Type Light Electric; Heavy Electric; Light EOH; Heavy EOH
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbreviated
(Left Submenu Layer)
Submenus (Right Submenu Layer)
3
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
25 Trailer Name Trailer Name
Trailer # (# is equal to slot position)
Boat
Car
Cargo
Dump
Equipment
Flatbed
Gooseneck
Horse
Livestock
Motorcycle
Snowmobile
Travel
Utility
5th Wheel
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbreviated
(Left Submenu Layer)
Submenus (Right Submenu Layer)
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115
Turn Menu Off — If Equipped
Push and release the right arrow button to exit
the main menu.
Push and release any instrument cluster display
control button to enter the instrument cluster
display main menu again.
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional
monitoring of the electrical system and status
of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions
will take place to extend the driving time and
distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical
loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a
risk of battery depletion to the point where the
vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply,
or will not restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will
appear in the instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery
has a low state of charge and continues to lose
electrical charge at a rate that the charging
system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from
load reduction. The charging system
performs a diagnostic on the charging
system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it
may indicate a problem with the charging
system. Refer to “Battery Charge Warning
Light” in this chapter for further information.
26 Compass Variance Compass Var
1-15 increments of 1
27 Calibrate Compass Compass Cal Cancel; Calibrate
28 Fuel Saver Display Fuel Saver On; Off
29
Park Assist Front
Chime Volume
Park Assist Front Chime
Volume
On; Off
30
Park Assist Rear
Chime Volume
Park Assist Rear Chime Volume On; Off
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbreviated
(Left Submenu Layer)
Submenus (Right Submenu Layer)
3
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
affected by load reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volt AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system
because the electrical loads are larger than
the capability of the charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical
loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and
interior lights, overloaded power outlets
+12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB ports) during
certain driving conditions (city driving,
towing, frequent stopping, etc.).
Installing options like additional lights,
upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated
by long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended
period of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was
not charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical
load left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volts portable appli-
ances like vacuum cleaners, game consoles
and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On”
or “Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if
possible:
Turn off redundant lights
(interior or exterior)
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB
ports
Check HVAC settings
(blower, temperature)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and
review specifications if any (load and Ignition
Off Draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecu-
tive trips, and if the evaluation and driving
pattern of the vehicle did not help to identify
the cause.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117
Instrument Cluster Display Programmable Features
The instrument cluster display can be used to view or change the following settings. Push the up or down arrow button until System Setup displays,
then push the right arrow button. Scroll through the settings using the up or down arrow button. Push the right arrow button to change the setting. Push
the left arrow button to scroll back to a previous menu or submenu.
• Language Select • Remote Start Comfort System
• Units • Easy Exit Seat
• ParkSense • Key Off Power Delay
• Tilt Mirror In Reverse • Commercial Settings
• Rain Sensing Wipers • Park Assist Front Chime Volume
• Hill Start Assist • Park Assist Rear Chime Volume
• Headlights Off Delay • Tire/Jack Mode
• Illuminated Approach • Transport Mode
• Headlights On With Wipers • Wheel Alignment Mode
• Automatic Highbeams • Horn With Remote Lower
• Flash Lights With Lock • Lights With Remote Lower
• Auto Lock Doors • Trailer Select
• Auto Unlock Doors • Brake Type
• Sound Horn With Remote Start • Trailer Name
• Sound Horn With Remote Lock • Compass Variance
• Remote Unlock Sequence • Calibrate Compass
• Key Fob Linked To Memory • Fuel Saver Display
• Passive Entry
3
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when
applicable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and must not be considered as
exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all
cases. Always refer to the information in this
chapter in the event of a failure indication. All
active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different
based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will
turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on
continuously and a chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and
will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.
If the light is either not on during startup, stays
on, or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various
brake functions, including brake fluid
level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a
problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two
seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
vehicle security alarm is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle
is disarmed.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This warning light warns of an
overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too
high, this indicator will illuminate and
a single chime will sound. If the temperature
reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will
sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning
(A/C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the
vehicle. If the temperature reading does not
return to normal, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
3
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the battery is not charging properly. If
it stays on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the
charging system. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the Electronic
Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the vehicle
is running, the light will either stay on or flash
depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle
the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is
placed in the PARK (P) position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service
as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check.
If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the Electric Power
Steering (EPS) system. Refer to
“Power Steering” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the Trailer Brake has been
disconnected.
Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a
door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single
chime.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
Yellow Warning Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an
Onboard Diagnostic System called
OBD II that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is
in the ON/RUN position before engine start.
If the bulb does not come on when turning the
ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system is Active. The “ESC Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will
come on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when
ESC is activated. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light”
comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this warning light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
the problem diagnosed and corrected.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This
could result in death or serious injury to the
driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage
to the vehicle control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability. If the
MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
3
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in
an ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is
off. Each time the ignition is turned to
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC
system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the windshield washer fluid is low.
Refer to “Engine Compartment” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for
further information.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label.
If your vehicle has tires of a different size than
the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine
the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires
is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and
steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair
kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one minute
and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches
approximately 3.0 gal (11.0 L) this
light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light monitors the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light
will turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required
as soon as possible. However, the conventional
brake system will continue to operate normally,
assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, have the brake system inspected
by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the
tire size equipped on your vehicle.
Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type,
and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire
sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become
inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
3
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Low Coolant Level Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the
vehicle coolant level is low. Refer to
“Dealer Service” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for further information.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the fuel filler cap is loose. Properly
close the filler cap to disengage the
light. If the light does not turn off,
please see an authorized dealer.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
signal a fault with the 4WD system. If
the light stays on or comes on during
driving, it means that the 4WD system
is not functioning properly and that service is
required. We recommend you drive to the
nearest service center and have the vehicle
serviced immediately.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the
transmission fluid temperature is
running hot. This may occur with
severe usage, such as trailer towing. If
this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the
vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into PARK
(P) and run the engine at idle or slightly higher
until the light turns off.
Yellow Indicator Lights
Cargo Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cargo light is activated by
pushing the cargo light button on the
headlight switch.
4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive
mode, and the front and rear
driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed.
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW
mode. The front and rear driveshafts
are mechanically locked together
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. Low range provides a greater gear
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at
the wheels.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information on four-wheel drive
operation and proper use.
4WD Lock Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOCK
mode. The front and rear driveshafts
are mechanically locked together,
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information
on four-wheel drive operation and proper use.
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when TOW/HAUL mode is selected.
Refer to “Automatic Transmission” in
“Starting and Operating” for further
information.
Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate when Trailer Merge Assist
has been activated.
Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
4WD power transfer case is in the
NEUTRAL mode and the front and rear
driveshafts are disengaged from the
powertrain.
Green Indicator Lights
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the park lights or headlights are
turned on.
Refer to “Exterior Lights” in “Getting
To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the front fog lights are on.
Refer to “Exterior Lights” in “Getting
To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator
will flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal
lamps will flash. Turn signals can be
activated when the multifunction lever is
moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Speed Control SET Indicator Light — If
Equipped With 7 Inch Instrument Cluster
Display
This light will turn on when the speed
control is set. Refer to “Speed
Control” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
3
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4WD AUTO Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive auto
mode, and the front axle is engaged,
but the vehicle's power is sent to the
rear wheels. Four-wheel drive will be
automatically engaged when the vehicle senses
a loss of traction.
For further information on four-wheel drive
operation and proper use, refer to “Four-Wheel
Drive Operation — If Equipped” in “Starting And
Operating.”
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Stop/Start function is in
“Autostop” mode.
White Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Speed Control is ready, but
not set. Refer to “Speed Control” in
“Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Speed Control SET Indicator Light — If
Equipped With 3.5 Inch Instrument Cluster
Display
This light will turn on when the speed
control is set. Refer to “Speed
Control” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam
headlights are on. With the low beams
activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction
lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are
off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary
high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the
OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic
codes and other information to assist your
service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an
Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a
connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may
need to access this information to assist with
the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity”
in “Multimedia”.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
3
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
emissions control system. Failure to pass could
prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the “Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the
OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The
OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system should be determined not ready for the
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
the ON position, you will see the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until you
turn OFF the ignition or start the engine.
This means that your vehicle's OBD II system
is not ready and you should not proceed to
the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain
fully illuminated until you place the ignition in
the off position or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do
nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system
to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation you should
have your vehicle serviced before going to the
I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle
because the MIL is on with the engine running.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
129
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides
increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions.
The system automatically prevents wheel lock,
and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure
that the ABS is working properly each time the
vehicle is started and driven. During this
self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound
as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels begin to
lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel,
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic
stops may increase the likelihood of ABS
activation(s).
You also may experience the following when
ABS activates:
The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run
for a short time after the stop)
The clicking sound of solenoid valves
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop
NOTE:
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
NOTE:
ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modifica-
tion may result in degraded ABS performance.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to inter-
ference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment.
This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may lead
to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping
distance longer. Just press firmly on your
brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 SAFETY
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will
turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains
on or comes on while driving, it indicates that
the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and that service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the
brake system should be serviced as soon as
possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light”
does not come on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as
soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This
system includes Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS),
Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic
Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems work
together to enhance both vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer
Sway Control (TSC) and Hill Descent Control
(HDC).
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on
or comes on while driving, it indicates that the
brake system is not functioning properly and
that immediate service is required. If the “Brake
System Warning Light” does not come on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to
optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during
emergency braking maneuvers. The system
detects an emergency braking situation by
sensing the rate and amount of brake
application and then applies optimum pressure
to the brakes. This can help reduce braking
distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must
apply continuous braking pressure during the
stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of
a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
SAFETY 131
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
function manages the distribution of the
braking torque between the front and rear axles
by limiting braking pressure to the rear axle.
This is done to prevent overslip of the rear
wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) before the front
axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) anticipates the
potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s
steering wheel input and the speed of the
vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and
vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially
cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM
can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving
maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors, such as road conditions, leaving
the roadway, or striking objects or other
vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section for a complete
explanation of the available ESC modes.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system
enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC
corrects for oversteering or understeering of the
vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the oversteer
or understeer condition.
Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” located in the instrument cluster will start
to flash as soon as the ESC system becomes
active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” also flashes when the Trailer
Sway Control (TSC) is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins
to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may
occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll
overs, especially those that involve leaving
the roadway or striking objects or other
vehicles. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
4
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 SAFETY
(Continued)
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE:
Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the ESC system may have multiple operating
modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used
for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC
modes should only be used for specific reasons
as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times
when a more spirited driving experience is
desired. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode
may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the “ESC OFF” switch and the “ESC OFF
Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC
on again, momentarily push the “ESC OFF”
switch and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will
turn off.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle,
and may negatively affect the performance
of the ESC system. Changes to the steering
system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC
system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
SAFETY 133
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a
momentary button push will toggle the ESC
mode. Multiple momentary button pushes may
be required to return to ESC On.
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only and should not be used on any
public roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC
features are turned off. To enter the “Full Off”
mode, push and hold the “ESC OFF” switch for
five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with
the engine running. After five seconds, a chime
will sound, the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will
illuminate, and the “ESC OFF” message will
display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC on
again, momentarily push the “ESC OFF” switch.
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to
“Partial Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a
predetermined speed. When the vehicle speed
slows below the predetermined speed the
system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive
modes (if equipped).
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func-
tionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip
feature described in the TCS section), has
been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator
Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the
ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine
torque reduction and stability features are
disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is
unavailable. In an emergency evasive
maneuver, the ESC system will not engage
to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full
Off” mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only.
With the ESC switched off, the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavail-
able. In an emergency evasive maneuver,
the ESC system will not engage to assist in
maintaining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is
only intended for off-highway or off-road
use.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent collisions.
4
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 SAFETY
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON position. It should
go out with the engine running. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes
on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts
to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins
to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” come
on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON
position, the ESC system will be on even if it
was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light”
indicates the customer has elected to
have the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) in a reduced mode.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
Hill Descent Control (HDC) is intended for low
speed off road driving while in 4L Range. HDC
maintains vehicle speed while descending hills
during various driving situations. HDC controls
vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC Has Three States:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver
is actively overriding with brake or throttle
application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed)
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but
the following conditions must also be met to
enable HDC:
Driveline is in 4L Range
Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h)
Parking brake is released
Driver door is closed
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
SAFETY 135
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate
automatically if driven down a grade of
sufficient magnitude. The set speed for HDC is
selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by
using the gear shift +/-. The following
summarizes the HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but
will not activate.
R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
target speed selection, but will not affect the
gear chosen by the transmission. When actively
controlling HDC the transmission will shift
appropriately for the driver-selected set speed
and corresponding driving conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with
throttle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if
any of the following conditions occur:
Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle
or brake application
Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)
but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h)
Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an
uphill grade
Vehicle is shifted to PARK (P)
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of
the following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the HDC switch
The driveline is shifted out of 4L Range
The park brake is applied
The driver door opens
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately)
HDC detects excessive brake temperature
4
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 SAFETY
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers
feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illumi-
nate and remain on solid when HDC is
enabled or activated. This is the normal oper-
ating condition for HDC.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when the
driver pushes the HDC switch but enable
conditions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when HDC
disables due to excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
when HDC deactivates due to overheated
brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will
activate again once the brakes have cooled
sufficiently.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is designed to
mitigate roll back from a complete stop while on
an incline. If the driver releases the brake while
stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold
the brake pressure for a short period. If the
driver does not apply the throttle before this
time expires, the system will release brake
pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as
normal.
The following conditions must be met in order
for HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The park brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE (R) gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE (R) gear and all
forward gears. The system will not activate if
the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL
(N). For vehicles equipped with a manual
transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA
will remain active.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending
hills. The driver must remain attentive to the
driving conditions and is responsible for
maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA
is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to
other vehicles, people, and objects, and most
importantly brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
SAFETY 137
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster
display, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings,
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with an instrument
cluster display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels
pointing straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than
one-half turn to the left.
6. Push the “ESC OFF” button located in the
lower switch bank below the climate control
four times within 20 seconds. The “ESC OFF
Indicator Light” should turn on and turn off
two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center
and then an additional slightly more than
one-half turn to the right.
8. Place the ignition in the OFF mode and then
back to on. If the sequence was completed
properly, the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will
blink several times to confirm HSA is
disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this
feature to its previous setting.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated
and deactivated with the brake switch. If
so, there may not be enough brake pres-
sure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer
on a hill when the brake pedal is released.
In order to avoid rolling down an incline
while resuming acceleration, manually acti-
vate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle
brake pressure prior to releasing the brake
pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting your
vehicle. Also, be certain to place the trans-
mission in PARK (P).
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision or serious personal injury.
4
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 SAFETY
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) uses sensors in the
vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying
trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become
active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda-
tions. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the
engine power may be reduced and you may feel
the brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” or “Full Off” modes.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the
amount of wheel spin of each of the driven
wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s)
and/or reduce engine power to provide
enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature
of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD),
functions similar to a limited slip differential
and controls the wheel spin across a driven
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning
faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more
engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is
not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if
TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based
on the vehicle recommended cold placard
pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
driven - this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the
low-pressure warning limit for any reason,
including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer
sway.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
SAFETY 139
(Continued)
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists,
and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at
or above the recommended cold placard
pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(TPMS Warning Light) illuminates, you must
increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS
Warning Light to turn off. The system will
automatically update and the TPMS Warning
Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If
the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately
23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS
Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi
(186 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still
be on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light
will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance or to provide
warning of a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-
sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the orig-
inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warning have been estab-
lished for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or
sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
wheels can cause sensor damage.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could
damage the TPMS sensor.
CAUTION! (Continued)
4
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 SAFETY
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using
an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning
Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the
actual tire pressure in the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle
monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following
components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster
and a chime will sound when tire
pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a graphic
showing the pressure values of each tire with
the low tire pressure values in a different color.
An "Inflate to XX" message will also be
displayed.
“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” Message
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure
condition (those in a different color in the
instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the "Inflate to XX" message.
Once the system receives the updated tire
pressures, the system will automatically
update, the graphic display in the instrument
cluster will return to its original color, and the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
SAFETY 141
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the “TPMS Warning
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. The system fault will also
sound a chime. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure
value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If
the system fault no longer exists, the “TPMS
Warning Light” will no longer flash, and the
"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer
display, and a pressure value will display in
place of the dashes. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
Signal interference due to electronic devices
or driving next to facilities emitting the same
radio frequencies as the TPM sensors
Installing aftermarket window tinting that
contains materials that may block radio wave
signals
Accumulation of snow or ice around the
wheels or wheel housings
Using tire chains on the vehicle
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM
sensors
A system fault may occur due to an incorrect
TPM sensor location condition. When a system
fault occurs due to an incorrect TPM sensor
location, the “TPMS Warning Light” will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. The system fault will also sound a chime.
In addition, the instrument cluster will display a
“Tire Pressure Temporarily Unavailable”
message in place of the tire pressure display
screen. If the ignition switch is cycled, this
sequence will repeat, providing the system fault
still exists. If the system fault no longer exists,
the “TPMS Warning Light” will no longer flash
and the tire pressure display screen will be
displayed showing the tire pressure values for
the correct locations.
4
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 SAFETY
Vehicles With Non Matching Full Size Spare Or
Compact Spare
The non matching full size spare or compact
spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
pressure in the non matching full size spare
or compact spare tire.
If you install the non matching full size spare
or compact spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure
warning limit, upon the next ignition switch
cycle, the TPMS Warning Light and a “LOW
TIRE” message will remain on and a chime
will sound. In addition, the graphic in the
instrument cluster will still display a pressure
value in a different color and an “Inflate to
XX” message.
After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. In addition, the instru-
ment cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five
seconds and then display dashes (--) in place
of the pressure value.
For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a
chime will sound, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the instrument cluster
will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (--) in place of the pres-
sure value.
Once you repair or replace the original road
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of
the non matching full size spare or compact
spare, the TPMS will update automatically. In
addition, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off
and the graphic in the instrument cluster will
display a new pressure value instead of
dashes (--), as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of
the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
SAFETY 143
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your
passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air
bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to “Child
Restraints” in this section for further
information) must be secured in the
appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this
section for further information).
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and
deployment occurs, the side air bags will
inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
4
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 SAFETY
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled
person, refer to the “Customer Assistance”
section for customer service contact
information.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position,
a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until both outboard front seat belts
are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
SAFETY 145
(Continued)
(Continued)
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on
the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
recommended that pets be restrained in the
rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until the driver and
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions except the Quad Cab and
Crew Cab front center seating position have
combination lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always
be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
WARNING! (Continued)
A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against
your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it
to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possi-
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
WARNING! (Continued)
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
a collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
SAFETY 147
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automat-
ically retract to its stowed position. If
necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
4
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as
possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter
the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger
seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze
the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a
lower position, and if you are taller than
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up
or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button.
To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will with-
draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjust-
ments when the vehicle is stationary.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
SAFETY 149
First Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions (Regular Cab Only)
The first row center seat belt (Regular Cab only)
features a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and
buckle, which allows the seat belt to detach
from the lower anchor when the seat is folded.
The latch plate and regular latch plate can then
be stored out of the way in the seat for added
convenience to open up utilization of the
storage areas behind the front seats when the
seat is not occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular
latch plate from its stowed position on the
seat.
Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle
Mini-Latch And Mini-Buckle Connected
2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat
belt over the seat.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the
right head restraint.
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the mini-latch plate into the
mini-buckle until you hear a “click.”
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow
the seat belt to go around your lap.
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on
the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the
risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so
that it is comfortable and not resting on your
neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack
in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle.
4
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 SAFETY
(Continued)
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the
mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular
latch plate into the center red slot on the
mini-buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the
mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into
its stowed position.
Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
First Row Center Lap Belt Operating
Instructions — If Equipped
The center seating position for the Quad Cab
and Crew Cab front seat has a lap belt only. To
buckle the lap belt, slide the latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a "click." To lengthen the
lap belt, tilt the latch plate and pull.
To remove slack, pull the loose end of the
webbing. Wear the lap belt snug against the
hips. Sit back and upright in the seat, then
adjust the seat belt as tightly as is comfortable.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and
the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
(if equipped) is in its lowest position, an
authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be
used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not
required for a different occupant, it must be
removed.
WARNING!
If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are
not properly connected when the seat belt
is used by an occupant, the seat belt will
not be able to provide proper restraint and
will increase the risk of injury in a collision.
When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing
is not twisted. If the webbing is twisted,
follow the preceding procedure to detach
the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle,
untwist the webbing, and reattach the
mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi-
cally required in order to properly fit the
original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the
Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the
distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
SAFETY 151
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury in
the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision.
Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the
air bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not
needed can increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a collision. Only use the
Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not
long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and
store the Seat Belt Extender when not
needed.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 SAFETY
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR) — If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions may be equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is
used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under
the “Child Restraints” section of this manual.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature
for each seating position.
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
Quad Cab/Crew Cab Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate
into the buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Cinching Latchplate — Cinching Latchplate
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
SAFETY 153
(Continued)
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire seat belt is
extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air
Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of
the electronic parts of the air bag
system whenever the ignition switch
is in the START or ON/RUN position. If
the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the
ACC position, the air bag system is not on and
the air bags will not inflate.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
is not working properly when checked
according to the procedures in the Service
Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in
collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 SAFETY
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes
disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
record the nature of the malfunction. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be
disabled. In this condition the air bags may not
be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a
collision. If the light does not come on as a
bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
SAFETY 155
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has
multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to the
severity and type of collision as determined by
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in less
severe collisions. A higher energy output is used
for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver
and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch
that detects whether the driver or front
passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli-
sion severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them manu-
ally. You may damage the air bags and you
could be injured because the air bags may
no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags
are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
4
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 SAFETY
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide
additional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators
of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate
the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved
interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side impacts, in
addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
SAFETY 157
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG”.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers
the window. The SABICs inflate with enough
force to injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain side impact
events.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the
SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
do not install any accessory items in your
vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not
add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle.
Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill
into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
4
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 SAFETY
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events. The
system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In
side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy
independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not Side Air Bags should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not
impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your protec-
tion in all collisions. They also help keep
you in position, away from an inflating Side
Air Bag. To get the best protection from the
Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be
properly restrained in a child restraint or
booster seat that is appropriate for the size
of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
SAFETY 159
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether deployment in a particular
rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle
experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
and deployment is appropriate, the rollover
sensing system will deploy the side air bags and
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the
vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side
impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
nent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
4
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 SAFETY
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that gener-
ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla-
tion. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.
If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-
rior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event,
the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for
15 minutes from the intervention of the
Enhanced Accident Response System
Unlock the power door locks
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula-
tion Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt
pretensioners cannot protect you in another
collision. Have the air bags, seat belt
pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
SAFETY 161
(Continued)
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the igni-
tion to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and
remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid
draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle
for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
the ground near the engine compartment and
fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or
damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.
headlights) after an accident, reset the system
by following the procedure described below. If
you have any doubt, contact an authorized
dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident
Response System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition
START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body
structure, or add aftermarket side steps or
running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate acci-
dentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 SAFETY
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint
Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached
to the child restraint.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
SAFETY 163
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure
that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and
who have not reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
4
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 SAFETY
(Continued)
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint.
Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from
birth until they reach the weight or height limit of
the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be
used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two
years old. Children should remain rear-facing
until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a
rear support leg in this vehicle. The floor of
this vehicle is not designed to manage the
crash forces of this type of car seat. In a
crash, the support leg may not function as it
was designed by the car seat manufacturer,
and your child may be more severely injured
as a result.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
SAFETY 165
(Continued)
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
seat with a harness for as long as possible, up
to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use
a belt-positioning booster seat until the
vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s
seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning
booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat
belt.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can loosen
the child restraint attachments. Remove
the child restraint before adjusting the
vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 SAFETY
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child
is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure
the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming
or slouching can move the belt out of position. If
the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the
child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death. A child must always wear both the lap
and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
SAFETY 167
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points
for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There
are two lower anchorages located at the back of
the seat cushion where it meets the seatback
and one top tether anchorage located behind
the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts.
Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
seating positions, the seat belt must be used
with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
4
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 SAFETY
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Regular Cab LATCH Positions
Crew Cab 60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions
Quad Cab LATCH Positions
Crew Cab Full Bench LATCH Positions
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
SAFETY 169
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the LATCH
anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more than
65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be
used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing
or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower
anchorages from the outboard seating
positions?
N/A
Regular Cab Front, Quad Cab or Crew Cab with
full bench rear seat: use the seat belt and tether
anchor to install a child seat in the center
seating position.
Crew Cab with split bench rear seat: Child
restraints can be installed using the supplied
lower anchorages for the center seating
position.
4
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 SAFETY
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position does
not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat in the
center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraints can be removed in every
rear seating position if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint. Refer to “Head
Restraints” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
SAFETY 171
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback.
They are just visible when you lean
into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat
cushion.
Quad Cab/Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats Driver Side
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Regular Cab models have tether strap
anchorages behind the front center
and right seats. Quad Cab and
Crew Cab models have tether strap
anchorages located behind each of the
rear seats.
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages (Behind Covers)
Crew Or Quad Cab Outboard Tether Anchorage
Crew Or Quad Cab Center Tether Anchorage With Head
Restraint In Raised Position
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage and
a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap
will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
1 — Tether Strap Hook
2 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
3 — Tether Anchor
4
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 SAFETY
Center Seat LATCH
Regular Cab, Quad Cab Or Crew Cab Full Bench
Rear Seat: No Lower Center LATCH Anchorages
Available
Crew Cab Split Bench Rear Seat: Center LATCH
Anchorages Available
If a child restraint installed in the center
position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle
for the outboard position, do not use that
outboard position. If a child seat in the center
position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that
outboard position.
Always follow the directions of the child
restraint manufacturer when installing your
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems
will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the
instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to
check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
WARNING!
Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. This posi-
tion is not approved for installing child
seats using the LATCH attachments. You
must use the seat belt and tether anchor to
install a child seat in the center seating
position.
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint.
Please refer to “To Install A LATCH-Compat-
ible Child Restraint” for typical installation
instructions.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. Please
refer to “To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint” for typical installation instructions.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
SAFETY 173
(Continued)
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in
the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into
the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 SAFETY
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with either a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching
latch plate or both. Both types of seat belts are
designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor
and then letting the webbing retract back into
the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic
Locking Mode” description in “Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)” under
“Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional
information on ALR. The cinching latch plate is
designed to hold the lap portion of the seat belt
tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight
through a child restraint’s belt path.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
Quad Cab/Crew Cab Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Cinching Latchplate — Cinching Latchplate
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
SAFETY 175
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the
seat belt to install a forward facing child
restraint, up to the recommended weight limit
of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and
the child restraint is allowed, if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The rear head restraints can be removed in
every seating position if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint. Refer to
“Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the
seat belt against the belt path of the child
restraint?
Yes – Cinching Latch Plate
No – ALR
In positions with cinching latch plates (CINCH),
the buckle stalk may be twisted up to 3 full
turns. Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
4
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. For Crew And Quad Cab Models
Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get
a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position
to make room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
For Regular Cab Models
Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. Move the vehicle seat as
far rearward as possible to keep the child as
far from the passenger air bag as possible.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
SAFETY 177
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped:
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat
and/or raise the head restraint (if
adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear
seat can be moved forward and rearward
in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing
from the retractor to pass it through the belt
path of the child restraint. Do not twist the
belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too
close to the belt path opening of the child
restraint, you may have trouble tightening the
seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch
plate from the buckle and twist the short
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten
it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out, away from the child
restraint. Repeat steps 4 to 6, above, to
complete the installation of the child restraint.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you
shorten the buckle, disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle, turn the buckle around one
half turn, and insert the latch plate into the
buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
restraint installation tight, try a different seating
position.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
4
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
Regular Cab Trucks:
In the regular cab truck, the top tether
anchorages are located behind the center and
right passenger seats. There is a plastic cover
over each anchorage. To attach the tether strap
of the child restraint:
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach
over the seat back, under the head
restraint and to the tether anchor directly
behind the seat.
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path between the anchorage and the
child seat. The tether strap should go
between the head restraint posts
underneath the head restraint. You may
need to adjust the head restraint to the
upward position to pass the tether strap
underneath the head restraint and between
its posts.
3. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach
the hook to the square opening in the sheet
metal. Tighten the tether strap according to
the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing
car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the
location of approved tether anchorages in
your vehicle.
1 — Tether Strap Hook
2 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
3 — Tether Anchor
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger
Front Air Bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger, including
a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
SAFETY 179
Quad or Crew Cab Trucks
The top tether anchorages in this vehicle are
tether strap loops located between the rear
glass and the back of the rear seat. There is a
tether strap loop located behind each seating
position. Follow the steps below to attach the
tether strap of the child restraint.
Right Or Left Outboard Seats:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach
between the rear seat and rear glass to
access the tether strap loop.
Head Restraint In Raised Position
Tether Strap Loop With Center Head Restraint In
Raised Position
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach
over the seat back, under the head
restraint, through the tether strap loop
behind the seat and over to the tether strap
loop behind the center seat.
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head
restraint behind the child seat, though the
tether strap loop behind the seat and over
to the center tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop
4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap
loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And
Attached To Center Tether Strap Loop
4
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 SAFETY
NOTE:
If there are child seats in both of the outboard
(left and right) seating positions, the tether
strap hooks of both child seats should be
connected to the center tether strap loop. This
is the correct way to tether two outboard child
seats.
Center Seat:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach
between the rear seat and rear glass to
access the tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Loop With Head Restraint In Raised
Position
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach
over the seat back, under the head
restraint, through the tether strap loop
behind the seat and over to the tether strap
loop behind either the right or left outboard
seat.
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head
restraint behind the child seat, though the
tether strap loop behind the seat and over
to the right or left outboard tether strap
loop.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap
loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And
Attached To Outboard Tether Strap Loop
Installing Three Child Restraints:
1. Place a child restraint on each outboard
rear seat. Route the tether straps following
the directions for right and left seating
positions, above.
2. Attach both hooks to the center tether strap
loop, but do not tighten the straps yet.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
SAFETY 181
3. Place a child restraint on the center rear
seat. Route the tether strap following the
directions for the center seating position,
above.
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap
loop.
5. Tighten the tether straps according to the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions,
tightening the right and left tether straps
before the center tether strap.
Outboard And Center Seating Positions Shown
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the
anchorage position directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seat-
backs as you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
4
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 SAFETY
Exhaust Gas
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have a competent mechanic inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety
tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or
in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the
trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make sure
that all windows are closed and the climate
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your
heating or cooling controls to force outside
air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
speed.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
SAFETY 183
(Continued)
(Continued)
4
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the
light is either not on during starting, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with
the Air Bag System has been detected. It will
stay on until the fault is removed. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against
the windshield. See an authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
interfere with the operation of the accelerator,
brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that
is securely attached using the floor mat
fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle
in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER install
or stack an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured to
your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year
of your vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for inter-
ference, with the vehicle properly parked
with the engine off, fully depress the accel-
erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if
present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 SAFETY
(Continued)
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation
pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the floor mat
and may cause interference with the accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-
ference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
WARNING! (Continued)
It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
185
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and
fasten your seat belt.
The starter should not be operated for more
than 10-second intervals. Waiting a few
seconds between such intervals will protect the
starter from overheating.
Automatic Transmission
Start the engine with the transmission in the
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting
into any driving range.
NOTE:
This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal
must be pressed to shift out of PARK.
Starting the vehicle in NEUTRAL is not
possible unless the Manual Park Release has
been activated. For the Manual Park Release
operation refer to “Manual Park Release” in
“In Case Of Emergency”.
Tip Start Feature
Do not press the accelerator. Place the ignition
switch briefly to the START position and release
it. The starter motor will continue to run and will
automatically disengage when the engine is
running.
AutoPark — Rotary Gear Selector Only
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
placing the vehicle in PARK should the
situations on the following pages occur. It is a
backup system and should not be relied upon
as the primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will
engage are outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in the OFF
mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle
and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns
off the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary gear
selector and an 8-speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Ignition switched from RUN to ACC
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter-N-Go equipped vehicles, the
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will
change to ACC mode. After 30 minutes the igni-
tion switches to OFF automatically, unless the
driver turns the ignition switch OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits
the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary gear
selector and an 8-speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Driver’s door is ajar
Brake pedal is not depressed
The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then
Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument
cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster, causing the
“AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to Gear”
to not be seen. In these cases, the gear selector
must be returned to “P” to select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed
is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to
Shift to P” will be displayed in the instrument
cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h).
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to
place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A
VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK
by verifying that a solid (not blinking) “P” is
indicated in the Instrument Cluster Display
and near the gear selector. If the "P" indi-
cator is blinking, your vehicle is not in
PARK. As an added precaution, always
apply the parking brake when exiting the
vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a backup system
and should not be relied upon as the
primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h),
the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until
the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL
position can roll. As an added precaution,
always apply the parking brake when exiting
the vehicle.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
STARTING AND OPERATING 187
(Continued)
4WD LOW — If Equipped
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the
vehicle in 4WD LOW.
The message “AutoPark Disabled” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given
when all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver’s door is ajar
Vehicle is in 4WD LOW range
The message “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning
chime will continue until you shift the vehicle
into PARK or the driver’s door is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle
is in PARK by looking for the "P" in the
Instrument Cluster Display and near the gear
selector. As an added precaution, always apply
the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have
followed the “Normal Starting” procedure, it
may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it there while the
engine is cranking. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run
for 10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal and the
brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could
result in a flash fire causing serious
personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Jump Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at
a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying
again.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to
run, but not have enough power to continue
running when the ignition key is released. If this
occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator
pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release
the accelerator pedal and the ignition key once
the engine is running smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after a
10 second period of engine cranking with the
accelerator pedal held to the floor, wait
10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or
−30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these
temperatures, the use of an externally powered
electric engine block heater (available from an
authorized dealer) is recommended.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and
it will decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect
the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC
electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire
extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed under
the hood on the passenger side of the vehicle
near the right head lamp assembly. It is located
between the front grill and the radiator, but
underneath the black upper seal.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle
acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the
factory is a high-quality energy conserving type
lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with
anticipated climate conditions under which
vehicle operations will occur. For the
recommended viscosity and quality grades,
refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications”.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of
the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
Please check your oil level with the engine oil
indicator often during the break in period. Add
oil as required.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
(Continued)
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK.
The foot operated parking brake is located
below the lower left corner of the instrument
panel. To apply the park brake, firmly push the
park brake pedal fully. To release the parking
brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
Parking Brake Release
When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake
Warning Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is
detected, a chime will sound to alert the
driver. Fully release the parking brake before
attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade. Apply the parking brake before placing
the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make
it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied
whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally
injured.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
5
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-
gaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave
the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so
may cause the vehicle to roll and cause
damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake
system malfunction is indicated. Have the
brake system serviced by an authorized
dealer immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, turn the engine
OFF, and remove the key fob. When the
ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position, (or, with Keyless Enter-N-Go, when
the ignition is in the OFF mode) the trans-
mission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-
mission is in PARK before exiting the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Key Ignition Park Interlock — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be
in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the
LOCK/OFF (key removal) position. The key fob
can only be removed from the ignition when the
ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, and the
transmission is locked in PARK whenever the
ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position.
NOTE:
If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key fob in the ignition to warn you that this
safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be
started and stopped but the key fob cannot be
removed until you obtain service.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake
Transmission Shift Interlock System (BTSI) that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be
turned to the ON/RUN mode (engine running,
for vehicles with eight-speed transmission) and
the brake pedal must be pressed.
In 8-speed vehicles, the brake pedal must also
be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or
moving at low speeds.
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission is controlled using a rotary
electronic gear selector located on the
instrument panel. The transmission gear range
(PRND) is displayed both above the gear
selector and in the instrument cluster. To select
a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector.
You must press the brake pedal to shift the
transmission out of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when
the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds).
To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such
as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear
selector to the appropriate detent. Select the
DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission
gear (for example, driver selects PARK while
driving), the position indicator will blink continu-
ously until the selector is returned to the proper
position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition (in a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go)
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
The electronically-controlled transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs,
along with environmental and road conditions.
The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on
a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is
a normal condition, and precision shifts will
develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions.
Manual downshifts can be made using the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control.
Pressing the GEAR-/GEAR+ switches (on the
steering wheel) while in the DRIVE position will
select the highest available transmission gear,
and will display that gear limit in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Refer to “Electronic
Range Select (ERS) Operation” in this section
for further information. Some models will
display both the selected gear limit, and the
actual current gear, while in ERS mode.
Electronic Transmission Gear Selector
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when
shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another
gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important when
the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use
PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift
the transmission into PARK first, and then apply
the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward
the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the engine off.
Remove the key fob.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the park brake. Always apply the
park brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
(Continued)
(Continued)
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-
mission is in PARK before exiting the
vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the park brake, shift the trans-
mission into PARK, turn the engine OFF,
and remove the key fob. When the ignition
is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal) position
(or, with Keyless Enter-N-Go, when the igni-
tion is in the OFF mode), the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the park brake, brake
pedal or the transmission gear selector.
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition (in a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go)
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must start the
engine, and also press the brake pedal.
Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
Look at the transmission gear position
display and verify that it indicates the PARK
position, and is not blinking.
With brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running.
Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating
conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs
(such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong head winds, or while towing
a heavy trailer), select TOW/HAUL mode or use
the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control
(refer to "Electronic Range Select (ERS)
Operation" in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear range.
Under these conditions, using a lower gear
range will improve performance and extend
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures
(-22°F [-30°C] or below), transmission
operation may be modified depending on
engine and transmission temperature as well
as vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume
once the transmission temperature has risen to
a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored
electronically for abnormal conditions. If a
condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, Transmission Limp
Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission may operate only in certain gears,
or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may
be severely degraded and the engine may stall.
In some situations, the transmission may not
re-engage if the engine is turned off and
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. A message in the
instrument cluster will inform the driver of the
more serious conditions, and indicate what
actions may be necessary.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off
the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
unsafe practices that limit your response to
changing traffic or road conditions. You might
lose control of the vehicle and have a
collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission
damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
this chapter and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle”
in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage
after engine shutdown, perform this procedure
only in a desired location (preferably, at an
authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if
possible. If not, shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL.
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. On
vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-Go, push and
hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer
at your earliest possible convenience. An autho-
rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to
assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control
allows the driver to limit the highest available
gear when the transmission is in DRIVE. For
example, if you set the transmission gear limit
to 4 (FOURTH gear), the transmission will not
shift above FOURTH gear (except to prevent
engine overspeed), but will shift through the
lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode
at any vehicle speed. When the transmission
gear selector is in DRIVE, the transmission will
operate automatically, shifting between all
available gears. Tapping the GEAR - switch (on
the steering wheel) will activate ERS mode,
display the current gear in the instrument
cluster, and set that gear as the top available
gear.
Once in ERS mode, tapping the GEAR - or GEAR
+ switch will change the top available gear.
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the
GEAR + switch until the gear limit display
disappears from the instrument cluster.
1 — GEAR - Switch
2 — GEAR + Switch
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle
could skid, causing a collision or personal
injury.
5
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer,
carrying a heavy load, etc., and frequent
transmission shifting occurs, push the
TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/HAUL mode.
This will improve performance and reduce the
potential for transmission overheating or failure
due to excessive shifting.
TOW/HAUL Switch
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate
in the instrument cluster and a light on the
switch to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has
been activated. Pushing the switch a second
time restores normal operation. Normal
operation is always the default at engine
start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the
switch must be pushed each time the engine is
started.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF
EQUIPPED
Four-wheel drive trucks are equipped with
either a manually shifted transfer case or an
electronically shifted transfer case. Refer to the
operating instructions for your transfer case,
located in this section for further information.
Four-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer
Case
This is an electronically shifted transfer case
and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch
(Transfer Case Switch), which is located on the
instrument panel.
Four-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case
This electronically shifted transfer case
provides four mode positions:
Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range
(4WD LOCK)
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
N (Neutral)
For additional information on the appropriate
use of each transfer case mode position, see
the information below:
2WD
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
normal street and highway driving on dry hard
surfaced roads.
WARNING!
Do not use the TOW/HAUL feature when
driving in icy or slippery conditions. The
increased engine braking can cause the rear
wheels to slide, and the vehicle to swing
around with the possible loss of vehicle
control, which may cause an accident
possibly resulting in personal injury or death.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
4WD LOCK
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range
engages and maintains 4WD forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
This range should be used for additional
traction for loose and/or slippery road surfaces.
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range
engages 4WD and provides low speed
four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the
front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range
provides additional traction and maximum
pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
N (Neutral)
N (Neutral)— This range disengages both the
front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain.
To be used for flat towing behind another
vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in this
chapter for further information.
This electronically shifted transfer case is
designed to be driven in the two–wheel drive
position (2WD) for normal street and highway
conditions on dry hard surfaced roads. Driving
the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel
economy benefits as the front axle is not
engaged in 2WD.
When additional traction is required, the
transfer case 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW
positions can be used to maximize torque to the
front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is
accomplished by pushing the desired position
on the 4WD control switch.
Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this section for
specific shifting instructions.
The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are
designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW
positions on dry, hard surfaced roads may
cause increased tire wear and damage to the
driveline components.
NOTE:
The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located in
the center of the 4WD Control Switch and is
pushed by using a ballpoint pen or similar
object. The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to
be used for recreational towing only. Refer to
“Recreational Towing” in this chapter for further
information.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
(4WD and 4LOW) are located in the instrument
cluster and indicate the current and desired
transfer case selection. When you select a
different transfer case position, the indicator
lights will do the following:
If all of the following shift conditions are met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn
OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will
flash until the transfer case completes the
shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator
light for the selected position will stop
flashing and remain ON.
5
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
If shift conditions are not met, one or more of
the following events may occur:
1. The indicator light for the current position
will remain ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light
will continue to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE:
Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new
transfer case position have been met. To retry
the selection, push the current position, wait
five seconds, and retry selection. To find the
shift requirements, refer to the "Shifting Proce-
dure" for your transfer case, located in this
section.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the
electronically shifted transfer case. If this light
remains on after engine start up or illuminates
during driving, it means that the four-wheel
drive system is not functioning properly and that
service is required.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. This could
cause damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the
engine speed is approximately three times that of
the 2WD, 4WD or 4WD LOCK positions at a given
road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference in
tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when
powering down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD
Warning Light” is illuminated. Not engaging
the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll
which may cause personal injury or death.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if
you leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position
without first fully engaging the parking
brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) posi-
tion disengages both the front and rear
drive shaft from the powertrain, and will
allow the vehicle to roll, even if the trans-
mission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the
transfer case will not shift. The position indi-
cator light for the previous position will
remain on and the newly selected position
indicator light will continue to flash until all
the requirements for the selected position
have been met.
If all the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have been met, the
current position indicator light will turn off,
the selected position indicator light will flash
until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indi-
cator light for the selected position will stop
flashing and remain on.
2WD To 4WD LOCK
Push the desired position on the 4WD control
switch to shift the transfer case. Shifts between
2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in
motion, the transfer case will engage/
disengage faster if you momentarily release the
accelerator pedal after selecting the desired
position on the control switch. If the vehicle is
stopped, the ignition must be in the ON position
with the engine either running or off. This shift
cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in
the ACC position.
NOTE:
The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts
between 2WD/4WD LOCK if the front and/or
rear wheels are spinning (no traction). In this
situation, the selected position indicator light
will flash and the original position indicator light
will remain ON. At this time, reduce speed and
stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.
2WD Or 4WD LOCK To 4WD LOW
NOTE:
When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some
gear noise may be heard. This noise is
normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle
or occupants.
When shifting into 4WD LOW press and hold
the button until the indicator light starts
blinking.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle
rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely
stopped. Use either of the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle
to 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, push the desired position
on the transfer case control switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is
ON (not flashing), shift the transmission
back into gear.
5
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position
and the engine running, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Push the desired position on the transfer
case control switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is
ON (not flashing), shift the transmission
back into gear.
NOTE:
If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alter-
nate Procedure are not satisfied prior to
attempting the shift or if they no longer are
being met while the shift attempt is in
process, the desired position indicator light
will flash continuously while the original posi-
tion indicator light is ON, until all require-
ments have been met.
The ignition switch must be in the ON position
for a shift to take place and for the position
indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition
switch is not in the ON position, then the shift
will not take place and no position indicator
lights will be on or flashing.
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
The limited-slip differential provides additional
traction on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel,
particularly when there is a difference between
the traction characteristics of the surface under
the right and left rear wheels. During normal
driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit
performs similarly to a conventional differential.
On slippery surfaces, however, the differential
delivers more of the driving effort to the rear
wheel having the better traction.
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful
during slippery driving conditions. With both
rear wheels on a slippery surface, a slight
application of the accelerator will supply
maximum traction. When starting with only one
rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface,
slight momentary application of the parking
brake may be necessary to gain maximum
traction.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden
accelerations when both rear wheels are on a
slippery surface. This could cause both rear
wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to slide
sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in
a turn.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — 5.7L ENGINES
ONLY (IF EQUIPPED)
This feature offers improved fuel economy by
shutting off four of the engine's eight cylinders
during light load and cruise conditions. The
system is automatic with no driver inputs or
additional driving skills required.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip
differential never run the engine with one rear
wheel off the ground since the vehicle may
drive through the rear wheel remaining on the
ground. You could lose control of the vehicle.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
POWER STEERING
Electric Power Steering
The Electric Power Steering system will give you
effective vehicle response and increased ease
of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system
will vary its assist to provide light efforts while
parking and proper feel while driving. If the
electric steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing assist, you will still
have the ability to steer the vehicle manually.
If the Steering icon is flashing, it indicates that
the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power
steering assistance.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the
“POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP”
message is displayed on the instrument cluster
screen, they indicate that extreme steering
maneuvers may have occurred which caused
an over temperature condition in the power
steering system. Once driving conditions are
safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few
moments until the icon and message turn off.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the
“SERVICE POWER STEERING – ASSIST OFF”
message is displayed the instrument cluster
screen, they indicate the vehicle needs to be
taken to the dealer for service. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no
longer operational, it is still possible to steer
the vehicle. Under these conditions there will
be a substantial increase in steering effort,
especially at low speeds and during parking
maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
20 mph (32 km/h) or 25 mph (40 km/h),
depending on the powertrain.
The Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Speed Control Buttons
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control system has been designed to shut down
if multiple Speed Control functions are operated
at the same time. If this occurs, the Speed
Control system can be reactivated by pushing
the Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
1 — ON/OFF
2 — RES (+)
3 — SET (-)
4 — CANCEL
5
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster display will
illuminate. To turn the system off, push the
ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should
be turned off when not in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (-)
button and release. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pushing the
SET (-) button.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings (if
equipped). Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependent on
the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or
Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings (if
equipped). Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependent on
the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or
Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could
accidentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose control
and have an accident. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Speed Control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without
Speed Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
(+) button and release. Resume can be used at
any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the
CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure while
slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Speed
Control without erasing the set speed from
memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button, or placing the
ignition in the OFF position, erases the set
speed from memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the
Speed Control without erasing the set speed
from memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system
provides visual and audible indications of the
distance between the rear fascia and a
detected obstacle when backing up (e.g. during
a parking maneuver). Refer to “ParkSense
System Usage Precautions” in this section for
limitations of this system and
recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
5
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled
at this gear selector position, the system will
remain active until the vehicle speed is
increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. When in REVERSE and above the
system's operating speed, a warning will appear
within the instrument cluster display indicating
the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 18 inches (45 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depending
on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display. It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if “Sound and Display” is selected.
NOTE:
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning
display will turn on indicating the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in the left and/or right rear
regions based on the object’s distance and
location relative to the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right
rear region, the display will show a single solid
arc in the left and/or right rear region and the
system will produce a tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to
the vehicle and the tone will change from a
single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to
continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone
Slow Tone
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
Fast Tone Continuous Tone
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the
warning display shows one flashing arc and
sounds a continuous tone. The following chart
shows the warning alert operation when the
system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches (200 cm)
79-45 inches
(200-115 cm)
45-31 inches
(115-80 cm)
31-18 inches
(80-45 cm)
Less than 18 inches
(45 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None
Single 1/2 Second
Tone
Slow Fast Continuous
Arc None 4th Solid 3rd Solid 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No Yes Yes Yes Yes
5
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The rear chime volume settings are
programmable.
The settings may be programmed through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings ”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed
to disable the system, the instrument
cluster display will show the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the
instrument cluster display will show the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE:
The ParkSense system will automatically
disable when the system detects that a trailer
with trailer brakes has been connected to the
Integrated Trailer Brake Module. The instru-
ment cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE
OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or defective. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the
system is enabled.
If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and the
system is disabled or requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily,
and then the LED will be on.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
Rear Park Assist System has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle,
and it will show the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE REAR SENSORS" or the "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument
cluster display will show the "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message for as long as the vehicle
is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense
will not operate.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" appears in the instrument cluster
display make sure the outer surface and the
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean
and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction, and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear, see an
authorized dealer.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" appears in the instrument cluster
display, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car
wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the Park-
Sense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of Park-
Sense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster display will show "PARKSENSE OFF".
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if
you cycle the ignition key.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned
off, the instrument cluster display will show
the "PARKSENSE OFF" message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
Ensure the ParkSense system is off if objects
such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.,
are placed within 18 inches (45 cm) from the
rear fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so can result in the system
misinterpreting a close obstacle as a sensor
problem, causing the "PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message to
appear in the instrument cluster display.
On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, Park-
Sense should be disabled when the tailgate
is in the lowered or open position and the
vehicle is in REVERSE. A lowered tailgate
could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
5
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides
visual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear, and/or front fascia/bumper,
and a detected obstacle when backing up or
moving forward (e.g. during a parking
maneuver).
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage
Precautions” in this section for limitations of
this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is
enabled at one of these gear selector positions,
the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. A warning will appear in the
instrument cluster display when the vehicle is in
REVERSE, indicating the vehicle is above
ParkSense operating speed. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 18 inches (45 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depending
on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front
fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depending
on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display. It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper
and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if “Sound and Display” is selected.
NOTE:
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
ParkSense Display
The warning display will turn on indicating the
system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE
or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle
has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in the left and/or right rear
regions based on the obstacle’s distance and
location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
rear region, the display will show a single arc in
the left and/or right rear region and the system
will produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer
to the obstacle, the display will show the single
arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone
will change from a single 1/2 second tone to
slow, to fast, to continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone
Slow Tone
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
5
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert
operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches (200 cm)
79-45 inches
(200-115 cm)
45-31 inches
(115-80 cm)
31-18 inches
(80-45 cm)
Less than
18 inches (45 cm)
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
47 inches (120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches (30 cm)
Audible Alert (Chime) None
Single 1/2 Second
Tone (for rear only)
Slow (for rear only) Fast Continuous
Arcs None 4th Solid 3rd Solid 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No Yes Yes Yes Yes
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist
audible alert (chime) after approximately three
seconds when an obstacle has been detected,
the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is
applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The Front and Rear chime volume settings are
programmable.
The settings may be programmed through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings ”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or Rear
ParkSense
Front ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the Front ParkSense switch.
Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the Rear ParkSense switch.
When the Front or Rear ParkSense
switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster display
will show the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for approximately five seconds. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE
and the Front or Rear system is disabled, the
instrument cluster display will show the "FRONT
PARKSENSE OFF" or "REAR PARKSENSE OFF"
message for five seconds, followed by a vehicle
graphic with "OFF" in the corresponding side.
This vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE:
Arc alerts from the enabled ParkSense system,
will interrupt the five second messages, and the
instrument cluster display will show the vehicle
graphic with the corresponding arcs and "OFF"
message.
The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be
on when Front or Rear ParkSense is disabled or
requires service. The Front or Rear ParkSense
switch LED will be off when the Front or Rear
system is enabled. If the Front or Rear
ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system
requires service, the Front or Rear ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the
LED will be on.
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
system has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime,
once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message
for five seconds. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument
cluster display will display a "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS",
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" pop up message for five
seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle graphic
will be displayed with "UNAVAILABLE" at either
the front or rear sensor location depending on
where the fault is detected. The system will
continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is
functioning properly.
5
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
These arc alerts will interrupt the "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS",
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if an object is
detected within the five second pop-up
duration. The vehicle graphic will remain
displayed for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument
cluster display make sure the outer surface and
the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
appear see an authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument
cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car
wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear bumper are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep
the ParkSense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of Park-
Sense.
When you turn Front or Rear ParkSense off,
the instrument cluster display will read
“FRONT PARKSENSE OFF” or “REAR PARK-
SENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you turn
Front or Rear ParkSense off, it remains off
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the
ignition key.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and Front or Rear Park-
Sense is turned off, the instrument cluster
display will show the "FRONT PARKSENSE
OFF" or "REAR PARKSENSE OFF" message for
five seconds, followed by a vehicle graphic
with "OFF" in the corresponding side. This
vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication
that an obstacle is behind or in front of the
fascia/bumper.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
(Continued)
(Continued)
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the Park-
Sense system off if obstacles such as bicycle
carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within
18 inches (45 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close obstacle as a
sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message
to be appear in the instrument cluster
display.
On vehicles equipped with a tailgate,
ParkSense should be disabled when the tail-
gate is in the lowered or open position. A
lowered tailgate could provide a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you
to see an image of the rear surroundings of your
vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into
REVERSE or whenever it is initiated through the
"Backup Camera" button in the "Controls"
menu. Whenever the gear selector is put into
REVERSE, the image will be displayed in the
rearview mirror display (if equipped) or
Uconnect screen (if equipped) along with a
caution note to “check entire surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds
this note will disappear.
The ParkView Camera is located to the left of
the tailgate handle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
WARNING! (Continued)
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
CAUTION! (Continued)
5
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with Camera delay turned off), the rear Camera
mode is exited and the navigation or audio
screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
Camera delay turned on), the rear Camera
image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds
after shifting out of REVERSE unless the forward
vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
transmission is shifted into PARK or the ignition
is placed in the OFF position.
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is
activated through the "Backup Camera" button
in the "Controls" menu, a display timer for the
image is initiated. The image will continue to be
displayed until the display timer exceeds 10
seconds and the vehicle speed is above 8 mph
(13 km/h) or the touchscreen button "X" to
disable the display of the Rear View Camera
image is pressed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be
displayed continuously until deactivated via the
touchscreen button "X".
A touchscreen button "X" to disable display of
the camera image is made available when the
vehicle is not in REVERSE gear.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid
on the image to illustrate the width of the
vehicle and its projected backup path based on
the steering wheel position. The active guide
lines will show separate zones that will help
indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
NOTE:
For further information about how to access
and change the programmable features of the
ParkView Rear Backup Camera, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Zones
Distance To The Rear
Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using ParkView to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
Turning Rear View Camera Image On:
1. Press the "Controls" button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the "Backup Camera" button to
turn the Rear View Camera system on.
NOTE:
Once initiated by the "Backup Camera" button,
the Rear View Camera image may be deacti-
vated by pressing the "X" button on the touch-
screen. On deactivation, the previous selected
screen will appear.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GAS ENGINE
The fuel filler cap (gas cap) is located behind the
fuel filler door, on the left side of the vehicle.
Open the fuel door and remove the fuel cap by
turning it counter-clockwise.
Fuel Filler Cap
NOTE:
When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the gas cap
is tightened properly. The MIL in the instru-
ment cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not
secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap
is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the gas cap is
removed or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the
engine is running.
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into
a portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
gas containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emissions
control system could result from using an
improper fuel tank filler tube cap.
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impu-
rities into the fuel system.
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause
the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to
turn on.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling. When the
fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
5
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system
determines that the fuel filler cap is
loose, improperly installed, or
damaged, a loose gASCAP indicator
will display in the instrument cluster telltale
display area. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. Tighten the fuel
filler cap properly and push the RIGHT button to
turn off the message. If the problem continues,
the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started.
VEHICLE LOADING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is the
total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options
and cargo. The label also specifies maximum
capacities of front and rear axle systems
(GAWR). Total load must be limited so GVWR
and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the
allowable load weight a truck can carry,
including the weight of the driver, all
passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) is the
maximum permissible load on the front and
rear axles. The load must be distributed in the
cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not
exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the
components in the system with the lowest load
carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).
Heavier axles or suspension components
sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability does not necessarily
increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full
GAWR.
WARNING!
Always place container on the ground
before filling.
Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the
container when you are filling it.
Use only approved containers for flam-
mable liquid.
Do not leave container unattended while
filling.
A static electric charge could cause a spark
and fire hazard.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the
total weight of the vehicle with all fluids,
including vehicle fuel, at full capacity
conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your
vehicle on a commercial scale before any
occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the
front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can
best be determined by weighing it when it is
loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has
not been exceeded. The weight on the front and
rear of the vehicle should then be determined
separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR
of either the front or rear axles has been
exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR.
If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear
or rear to front as appropriate until the specified
weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is
distributed equally. Stow all loose items
securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an
adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers
and handles and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you
can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before
towing a trailer, carefully review this information
to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions
will assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be
limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in this chapter for further information.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR.
If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles.
This could cause you to lose control. Also
overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
5
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
weight of all cargo, consumables and
equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in
or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for
operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in
combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do
not exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to
“Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in
this chapter for further information.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The Tongue Weight (TW) is the downward force
exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height
multiplied by the maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) can be a
mechanical telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable
friction associated with the telescoping motion
to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying
motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine
power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer
tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located
at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of
the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the most
popular on the market today and they are
commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs
(2,267 kg) or more, it is recommended to
use a weight-distributing hitch to ensure
stable handling of your vehicle. If you use a
standard weight-carrying hitch, you could
lose control of your vehicle and cause a
collision.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front
axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions,
it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control, thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a
friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing
(load equalizing) hitch are recommended for
heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be
required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with GAWR
requirements.
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted weight distributing
hitch system may reduce handling, stability
and braking performance and could result
in a collision.
Weight distributing systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
5
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recommended Distribution Hitch Adjustment
1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to
the trailer (do not connect the trailer).
2. Measure the height of the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to ground, this
is height H1.
Measuring Height (H)
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the
weight distribution bars connected.
4. Measure the height of the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to ground, this
is height H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight
distributing bars per the manufacturers’
recommendations so that the height of the
front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/
2+H1 (about 1/2 the difference between
H2 and H1 above normal ride height [H1]).
6. Perform a visual inspection of the trailer
and weight distributing hitch to confirm
manufacturers’ recommendations have
been met.
NOTE:
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing
with TOW/HAUL mode engaged.
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer
Weight
The following chart provides the maximum
trailer weight a given factory equipped trailer
hitch type can tow and should be used to assist
you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your
intended towing condition.
Measurement
Example
Example Height
(mm)
H1 1030
H2 1058
H2-H1 28
(H2-H1)/2 14
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 1044
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
All trailer hitches should be professionally
installed on your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)
NOTE:
For trailer towing information (maximum trailer
weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
ramtruck.ca (Canada)
rambodybuilder.com
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing
the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,
additional factory-installed options or
dealer-installed options must be considered as
part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to
the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight
Hitch Type Max. Trailer Weight / Max. Tongue Weight
Class III Bumper Hitch 5,000 lbs (2,268 kg) / 500 lbs (226 kg)
Class IV 10,710 lbs (4,858 kg) / 1,070 lbs (485 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
5
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in the
“Scheduled Servicing”. Refer to “Scheduled
Servicing” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
the proper maintenance intervals. When towing
a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR
ratings.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
driven. The engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow
these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could
lose control of your vehicle and have a colli-
sion.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-
loading can cause a loss of control, poor
performance or damage to brakes, axle,
engine, transmission, steering, suspension,
chassis structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used
between your vehicle and trailer. Always
connect the chains to the hook retainers of
the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under
the trailer tongue and allow enough slack
for turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked
on a grade. When parking, apply the
parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the
tow vehicle transmission in PARK. For
four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always
block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between
the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer
hitch utilized.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h)
when towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
to the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for proper tire inflation proce-
dures.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
the proper inspection procedure.
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
with a higher load carrying capacity will not
increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR
limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
system or vacuum system of your vehicle
with that of the trailer. This could cause inad-
equate braking and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer
with electronically actuated brakes. When
towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic
surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your
vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over-
load your brake system and cause it to fail.
You might not have brakes when you need
them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stop-
ping distance. When towing, you should
allow for additional space between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs
(453 kg) loaded, it should have its own
brakes and they should be of adequate
capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake
pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
5
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
Integrated Trailer Brake Module — If
Equipped
Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer
Brake Module (ITBM) for Electric and Electric
Over Hydraulic (EOH) trailer brakes.
NOTE:
This module has been designed and verified
with electric trailer brakes and new electric over
hydraulic systems. Some previous EOH systems
may not be compatible with ITBM.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM)
The user interface consists of the following:
Manual Brake Control Lever
Slide the manual brake control lever to the left
to activate power to the trailer's electric brakes
independent of the tow vehicle's brakes. If the
manual brake control lever is activated while
the brake is also applied, the greater of the two
inputs determines the power sent to the trailer
brakes.
The trailer and the vehicle's brake lamps will
come on when either vehicle braking or manual
trailer brakes are applied.
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
This light indicates the trailer electrical
connection status.
If no electrical connection is detected after the
ignition is turned on, pushing either the GAIN
adjustment button or sliding the manual brake
control lever will display the GAIN setting for
10 seconds and the “Trailer Brake Status
Indicator Light” will not be displayed.
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the
“Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light” will flash.
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake
control power output to the trailer brakes in
0.5 increments. The GAIN setting can be
increased to a maximum of 10 or decreased to
a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).
GAIN
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake
control for the specific towing condition and
should be changed as towing conditions
change. Changes to towing conditions include
trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions and
weather.
Adjusting GAIN
NOTE:
This should only be performed in a traffic free
environment at speeds of approximately
20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good
working condition, functioning normally
and properly adjusted. See your trailer
dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical
connections according to the trailer
manufacturer's instructions.
1 — GAIN Adjustment Button
2 — GAIN Adjustment Button
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is
plugged in, the trailer connected message
should appear in the instrument cluster
display (if the connection is not recognized
by the ITBM, braking functions will not be
available), the GAIN setting will illuminate
and the correct type of trailer must be
selected from the instrument cluster display
options.
4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the
steering wheel until “TRAILER TOW”
appears on the screen.
5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel
to enter “TRAILER TOW”.
6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the
Trailer Brake Type appears on the screen.
7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP
or DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer
Brake Type appears on the screen.
8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer
on a dry, level surface at a speed of
20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and squeeze
the manual brake control lever completely.
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by
squealing tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if
the trailer wheels turn freely, increase the
GAIN setting.
Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at
a point just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing
a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be
attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting
of 10.
*The suggested selection depends and may change depending on the customer preferences for braking performance. Condition of the trailer brakes,
driving and road state may also affect the selection.
Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH
Type of Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes
Electric over Hydraulic
Trailer Brakes
Electric over Hydraulic
Trailer Brakes
Load
*Under 10,000 lbs
(4,536 kgs)
*Above 10,000 lbs
(4,536 kgs)
*Under 10,000 lbs
(4,536 kgs)
*Above 10,000 lbs
(4,536 kgs)
5
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
Display Messages
The trailer brake control interacts with the
instrument cluster display. Display messages,
along with a single chime, will be displayed
when a malfunction is determined in the trailer
connection, trailer brake control, or on the
trailer. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE:
An aftermarket controller may be available
for use with trailers with air or elec-
tric-over-hydraulic trailer brake systems. To
determine the type of brakes on your trailer
and the availability of controllers, check with
your trailer manufacturer or dealer.
Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it
may cause damage to the electrical system
and electronic modules of the vehicle. See an
authorized dealer if an aftermarket module is
to be installed.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the
trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the
trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to
the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a
trailer connector. Refer to the following
illustrations.
WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with
the ITBM system may result in reduced or
complete loss of trailer braking. There may be
a increase in stopping distance or trailer
instability which could result in personal injury.
CAUTION!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible
with the ITBM system may result in reduced
or complete loss of trailer braking. There may
be a increase in stopping distance or trailer
instability which could result in damage to
your vehicle, trailer, or other property.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connect) into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,
stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area
located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing.
The transmission controls include a drive
strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing.
However, if frequent shifting does occur while in
DRIVE, select TOW/HAUL mode or select a lower
gear range (using the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control).
NOTE:
Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower
gear range (using the ERS shift control) while
operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
When towing a loaded trailer up steep grades at
low speeds (20 mph [32 km/h] or below),
holding your vehicle in FIRST gear (using the
ERS shift control) can help to avoid
transmission overheating.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
5
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tow/Haul Mode
To reduce potential for automatic transmission
overheating, activate TOW/HAUL mode when
driving in hilly areas, or select a lower gear
range (using the Electronic Range Select (ERS)
shift control) on more severe grades.
Speed Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy
loads.
When using the Speed Control, if you experi-
ence speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back
to cruising speed.
Use Speed Control in flat terrain and with
light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission
overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
In city traffic — while stopped, place the
transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase
engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Temporarily turn off air conditioning.
SNOWPLOW
NOTE:
Do not use this model vehicle for snowplow
applications.
WARNING!
Snowplows and other aftermarket equipment
should not be added to the front end of your
vehicle. The airbag crash sensors may be
affected by the change in the front end
structure. The airbags could deploy
unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a
collision resulting in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could
adversely affect performance of the airbag
system in a collision. Do not expect that the
airbag will perform as described earlier in this
manual.
CAUTION!
Using this vehicle for snowplow applications
can cause damage to the vehicle.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The
Ground
Two-Wheel Drive
Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
Transmission in PARK
Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
5
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive
Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive
models) is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are
OFF the ground. This may be accomplished
using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow
dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place
automatic transmission in PARK.
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
5. Turn the ignition OFF and remove the key
fob.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed
for towing, to secure the front wheels in the
straight position.
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
Models
NOTE:
Both the manual shift and electronically shifted
transfer cases must be shifted into NEUTRAL for
recreational towing. Automatic transmissions
must be shifted into PARK for recreational
towing. Refer to the following for the proper
transfer case NEUTRAL shifting procedure for
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground
will cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Do not disconnect the driveshaft because
fluid may leak from the transmission,
causing damage to internal parts.
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing
with only one set of wheels on the ground
(front or rear) will cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage. Tow
with all four wheels either ON the ground, or
OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
Tow only in the forward direction. Towing
this vehicle backwards can cause severe
damage to the transfer case.
Before recreational towing, the transfer
case must be in NEUTRAL. To be certain the
transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL, perform
the procedure outlined under “Shifting Into
NEUTRAL”. Internal transmission damage
will result, if the transfer case is not in
NEUTRAL during towing.
The transmission must be placed in PARK
for recreational towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for recreational towing.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on
level ground, with the engine running.
Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL:
With manual shift transfer case, shift the
transfer case lever into NEUTRAL (N)
With the electronically shifted transfer
case, push and hold the transfer case
NEUTRAL (N) button. Some models have a
small, recessed “N” button (at the center
of the transfer case switches) that must
be pushed using a ballpoint pen or similar
object. Other models have a rectangular
NEUTRAL switch, below the rotary transfer
case control knob.
The NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will blink
while the shift is in progress. The light will
stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift
to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. After the shift
is completed and the NEUTRAL (N) light
stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
5. Release the parking brake.
6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds
and ensure that there is no vehicle
movement.
8. Repeat steps six and seven with automatic
transmission in DRIVE.
9. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Firmly
apply the parking brake. Turn off the engine.
For vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-Go, push
and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button
until the engine shuts off.
10. Shift the transmission into PARK. On
8-speed transmissions the gear selector will
automatically select PARK when the engine
is turned off.
Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft
because fluid will leak from the transfer
case, causing damage to internal parts.
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face
bar will be damaged.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both
the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the automatic transmission is in PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in
NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing to
prevent damage to internal parts.
5
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
11. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode, then
cycle the ignition to the RUN mode and back
to the OFF mode. Remove the key fob from
the ignition.
12. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
suitable tow bar.
13. Release the parking brake.
NOTE:
With electronically shifted transfer case:
Steps 2 through 4 are requirements that
must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N)
button, and must continue to be met until the
shift has been completed. If any of these
requirements are not met before pushing the
NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator
light will flash continuously until all require-
ments are met or until the NEUTRAL (N)
button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for
a shift to take place and for the position indi-
cator lights to be operable. If the ignition is
not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not
take place and no position indicator lights will
be on or flashing.
A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator
light indicates that shift requirements have
not been met.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop,
leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Start the engine. Shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL.
With manual shift transfer case, shift the
transfer case lever to the desired posi-
tion.
With electronically shifted transfer case
with rotary selector switch, push and hold
the transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button
until the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
turns off. After the NEUTRAL (N) indicator
light turns off, release the NEUTRAL (N)
button.
After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been
released, the transfer case will shift to
the position indicated by the selector
switch.
With electronically shifted transfer case
with push-button selector switch, push
and hold the switch for the desired
transfer case position, until the NEUTRAL
(N) indicator light turns off and the
desired position indicator light turns on.
NOTE:
When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL (N),
turning the engine off is not required, but may
be helpful to avoid gear clash. With the 8-speed
automatic transmission, the engine must
remain running, since turning the engine off will
shift the transmission to PARK (and the trans-
mission must be in NEUTRAL for the transfer
case to shift out of NEUTRAL).
5. Turn the engine off. Shift automatic
transmission into PARK. On 8-speed
transmissions the gear selector will
automatically select PARK when the engine
is turned off.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
6. Release the brake pedal.
7. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
8. Start the engine.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal.
10. Release the parking brake.
11. Shift the transmission into gear, release the
brake pedal, and check that the vehicle
operates normally.
NOTE:
With electronically shifted transfer case:
Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be
met before pushing the button to shift out of
NEUTRAL (N), and must continue to be met
until the shift has been completed. If any of
these requirements are not met before
pushing the button or are no longer met
during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator
light will flash continuously until all require-
ments are met or until the button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for
a shift to take place and for the position indi-
cator lights to be operable. If the ignition is
not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not
take place and no position indicator lights will
be on or flashing.
A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator
light indicates that shift requirements have
not been met.
DRIVING TIPS
Driving On Slippery Surfaces
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or
other slippery surfaces may cause the driving
wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This
phenomenon occurs when there is a difference
in the surface traction under the rear (driving)
wheels.
Driving Through Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your
vehicle.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause
sudden pulling of the rear wheels. You could
lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a
collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
5
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Flowing/Rising Water
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving
through shallow standing water, consider
the following Cautions and Warnings before
doing so.
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path
where water is flowing and/or rising (as in
storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away
the road or path's surface and cause your
vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to
follow this warning may result in injuries that
are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not
exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which
increases stopping distances. Therefore,
after driving through standing water, drive
slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal
several times to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing
water before driving through it. Never drive
through standing water that is deeper than
the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the
vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the
path that is under water and if there are any
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when
driving through standing water. This will
minimize wave effects.
Driving through standing water may cause
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
(i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is
milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
Off-Road Driving Tips
Care should be taken when attempting to climb
steep hills or driving diagonally across a hill or
slope. If natural obstacles force you to travel
diagonally up or down a hill, choose a mild angle
and keep as little side tilt as possible. Keep the
vehicle moving and make turns slowly and
cautiously.
If you must back down a hill, back straight down
using REVERSE gear. Never back down in
NEUTRAL or diagonally across the hill.
When driving over sand, mud, and other soft
terrain, shift to low gear and drive steadily.
Apply the accelerator slowly to avoid spinning
the wheels.
Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of
driving.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After
going off-road, it is always a good idea to check
for damage. That way you can get any problems
taken care of right away and have your vehicle
ready when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness,
particularly on the chassis, drivetrain compo-
nents, steering, and suspension. Retighten
them, if required, and torque to the values
specified in the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They
might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses,
axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand,
water, or similar dirty conditions, have the
radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake
linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
If you experience unusual vibration after
driving in mud, slush or similar conditions,
check the wheels for impacted material.
Impacted material can cause a wheel imbal-
ance and freeing the wheels of it will correct
the situation.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine
can cause it to lock up and stall out, and
cause serious internal damage to the
engine. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes
may cause excessive wear or unpredictable
braking. You might not have full braking
power when you need it to prevent a collision.
If you have been operating your vehicle in
dirty conditions, get your brakes checked and
cleaned as necessary.
5
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located
on the upper switch bank just below the radio.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard
Warning Flashers. When the switch is
activated, all directional turn signals
will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of
an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When leaving the vehicle to seek assistance,
the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to
operate even though the ignition is placed in the
OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning
Flashers may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an
ASSIST and a SOS button.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM
Guardian™ features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and
SiriusXM Guardian™ services when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 237
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only func-
tion if you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network. Other
Uconnect services will only be operable if
your SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active
and you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
you’ll be connected to someone who can
help. Roadside Assistance will know what
vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside
Assistance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care –
In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview
Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator.
To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the
SOS call button on the Rearview Mirror or press
the cancellation button on the Device Screen.
Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and
SOS buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn
green once a connection to a SOS operator
has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and
a SOS operator is made, the SOS Call
system may transmit the following
important vehicle information to a SOS
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a
SOS Call
The vehicle brand
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system
to determine if additional help is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM
Guardian™ features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and
SiriusXM Guardian™ services when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
6
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS
operator, the SOS operator may be able
to open a voice connection with the
vehicle to determine if additional help is
needed. Once the SOS operator opens a
voice connection with the vehicle’s SOS
Call system, the operator should be able
to speak with you or other vehicle occu-
pants and hear sounds occurring in the
vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system
will attempt to remain connected with the
SOS operator until the SOS operator
terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from an Emergency Services
Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the
vehicle’s operable network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable
network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable network and
GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add
aftermarket electrical equipment to the
vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a signal
to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the SOS Call system
to fail, never add aftermarket equipment
(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to
fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to help
protect you.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 239
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in
Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS
system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The Rearview Mirror light located within the
ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously be
illuminated red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state
“Vehicle device requires service. Please
contact an authorized dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors:
Delayed accessories mode is active
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
ware are damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are
unavailable or obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
congestion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If
the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module
turns on the air bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any
part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant
Restraint Control system immediately.
6
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network connection and a
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call
system to function properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM
Guardian™ features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and
SiriusXM Guardian™ services when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 241
(Continued)
FUSES
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This
center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses,
relays, and circuit breakers. A description of
each fuse and component may be stamped on
the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of
each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that
corresponds to the following chart.
Power Distribution Center Location
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses
may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, trans-
mission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F01 80 Amp Black – Rad Fan Control Module – If Equipped
F03 60 Amp Yellow – Rad Fan – If Equipped
F05 40 Amp Green – Compressor for Air Suspension – If Equipped
F06 40 Amp Green – Antilock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control Pump
F07 40 Amp Green – Starter Solenoid
F08
20 Amp Blue (1500 LD/
Cummins Diesel)
40 Amp Green
–
–
Emissions Diesel – If Equipped
Aux Relay Output- Special Services Only
F09
40 Amp Green (Special
Services Vehicle &
Cummins Diesel)
– Diesel Fuel Heater – If Equipped
F10 40 Amp Green – Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2
F10 50 Amp Red –
Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2 – If Equipped with
Stop/Start
F11 30 Amp Pink – Integrated Trailer Brake Module – If Equipped
F12 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #3 / Power Locks
F13 40 Amp Green – Blower Motor
F14 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #4 / Exterior Lighting
F15 40 Amp Green –
Spare Fuse
Special Services Only
F16 30 Amp Pink – Smart Bar – If Equipped
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 243
F19
20 Amp Blue
(1500 LD Diesel)
30 Amp Pink
(Cummins Diesel)
– SCR – If Equipped
F20 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F21 30 Amp Pink – Drive Train Control Module
F22
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink (Cummins
Diesel)
– Engine Control Module
F23 30 Amp Pink – Body Controller #1 / Interior Lighting
F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F25 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F26 30 Amp Pink – Antilock Brakes / Stability Control Module / Valves
F28 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup Lights – If Equipped
F29 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Parking Lights – If Equipped
F30 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Receptacle
F31
30 Amp Pink
(1500 LD Diesel)
– Urea Heater Control – If Equipped
F32 – – Spare Fuse
F33 20 Amp Blue – Special Services Vehicle Only
F34 30 Amp Pink – Vehicle System Interface Module #2 – If Equipped
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof – If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
6
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F36 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster – If Equipped
F37 30 Amp Pink – Cummins Diesel Fuel Heater #2 – If Equipped
F38 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter 115 Volt AC – If Equipped
F39 20 Amp Blue – Power Outlet – Special Services Only
F41 – 10 Amp Red Active Grille Shutter – If Equipped
F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F46 – 10 Amp Red Upfitter – If Equipped
F49 – 10 Amp Red Instrument Panel Cluster (Except Fleet Vehicles)
F50 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Control Module – If Equipped
F51 – 10 Amp Red
Ignition Node Module / Keyless Ignition (Instrument Panel
Cluster – Fleet Vehicles Only)
F52 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights - If Equipped
F54 – 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals - If Equipped
F56 – 15 Amp Blue Additional Diesel Content - If Equipped
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Transmission
F58 – 20 Amp Yellow Spare Fuse
F59 – 10 Amp Red SCR Relay – If Equipped
F60 – 15 Amp Blue Underhood Lamp/TCM
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 245
F61 –
10 Amp Red (1500 LD
Diesel & Cummins Diesel)
PM Sensor – If Equipped
F62 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils (Gas), Urea Heater (Cummins Diesel)
F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors / Powertrain
F65 – – Spare Fuse
F66 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof / Passenger Window Switches / Rain Sensor
F67 – 10 Amp Red CD / DVD / Bluetooth® Hands-free Module – If Equipped
F69 – 15 Amp Blue Mod SCR 12 Volt (Cummins Diesel) – If Equipped
F70 – 30 Amp Green Fuel Pump Motor
F71 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier - If Equipped
F72 – 10 Amp Red PCM – If Equipped
F73 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Transfer Pump (HD Only) – If Equipped
F74 –
20 Amp Yellow (Gas Engine
& 1500 LD Diesel)
Brake Vacuum Pump Gas/Diesel – If Equipped
F75 – 10 Amp Red Coolant Temperature Valve Actuator
F76 – 10 Amp Red Antilock Brakes / Electronic Stability Control - If Equipped
F77 – 10 Amp Red Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle Disconnect Module
F78 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module / Electric Power Steering
F79 – 15 Amp Blue Clearance Lights
F80 – 10 Amp Red Universal Garage Door Opener / Compass
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
6
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn / Stop Lights - If Equipped
F82 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module / Cruise Control
F83 – – Spare Fuse
F84 – 15 Amp Blue Switch Bank / Instrument Cluster
F85 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F86 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F87 – 10 Amp Red
Air Suspension – If Equipped / Trailer Tow / Steering
Column Control Module
F88 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster
F90/F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet (Rear Seats) Customer Selectable
F93 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter - If Equipped
F94 – 10 Amp Red Shifter / Transfer Case Module
F95 – 10 Amp Red Rear Camera / Park Assist - If Equipped
F96 – 10 Amp Red Rear Seat Heater Switch - If Equipped
F97 – 25 Amp Clear Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel – If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 247
(Continued)
F98 – 25 Amp Clear Front Heated Seats – If Equipped
F99 – 10 Amp Red Climate Control
F100 – 10 Amp Red Upfitters – If Equipped
F101 – 15 Amp Blue
Electrochromatic Mirror / Smart High Beams – If
Equipped
F104 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlets (Instrument Panel / Center Console)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution
center cover, it is important to ensure the
cover is properly positioned and fully
latched. Failure to do so may allow water to
get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important
to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a
dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must
be corrected.
CAUTION! (Continued)
6
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge base. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Overhead Console Lamps TS 212–9
Dome Lamp 7679
NOTE:
For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Base Quad Headlamp – Low Beam H11LL
Base Quad Headlamp – High Beam 9005LL
Front Turn Signal Lamp (Base Quad Headlamp) 3157NA
Premium Bi Halogen Projector Headlamp - Low Beam 9005Sl+
Premium Bi Halogen Projector Headlamp - High Beam 9005LL
Front Turn Signal Lamp (Premium Headlamp) LED (Serviced at authorized dealer)
Fog Lamp (Horizontal shape) 9145
Fog Lamp (Vertical shape) 9006
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 921K
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 249
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Base Quad / Premium Bi-Halogen: Low Beam
Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, Front Park
And Turn — If Equipped
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the six plastic push-in fasteners
that secure the upper radiator seal to the
grille support and both fender ledges.
4. Remove the two plastic push-in rivets that
secure the upper radiator seal to the
radiator.
5. Remove the upper radiator seal from the
vehicle.
6. Remove the two headlamp assembly
attachment screws.
Headlamp Assembly Attachment Screw Locations
Rear Cargo Lamp 921
LED Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)/Cargo Lamp LED (Serviced at authorized dealer)
Base Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp 3157K
Premium Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp LED (Serviced at authorized dealer)
Premium Backup Lamp 7440/W21W
Backup Lamp 921
Rear License Plate Lamp 194
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
6
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
7. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of
the front wheel, remove the fastener, and
lift the cover over the access hole in the
front of the wheel house splash shield.
Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained
through this access hole.
8. Reach through the access hole of the wheel
house splash shield and lift the slide lock
upward far enough to disengage it from the
lock post on the back of the front lamp unit
housing.
Slide Lock
9. Remove the headlamp assembly. Grasp the
outboard edge of the lamp and pull it
straight forward to disengage the ball stud
from the plastic grommet.
10. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors
from the bulb socket.
11. Replace bulb(s) as necessary.
NOTE:
There are access covers over both headlamp
bulb access holes in the quad front lamp unit
housing (if equipped). These covers MUST be
reinstalled after the bulb has been replaced.
Fog Lamps — If Equipped
1. Reach under and behind the front bumper
to access the back of the front fog lamp
housing.
2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness
connector from the fog lamp bulb.
3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
turn to unlock the bulb from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by
touching it with your fingers or by allowing it
to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened
bulb life will result.
Always use the correct bulb size and type
for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or
type may overheat and cause damage to
the lamp, the bulb socket, or the lamp
wiring.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by
touching it with your fingers or by allowing it
to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb
life will result.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 251
Rear Tail / Stop, Turn Signal And Backup
Lamps
1. Remove the two screws that pass through
the bed sheet metal.
Tail Lamp Screw Locations
2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward
far enough to unsnap the two receptacles
on the outboard side of the lamp housing
from the two plastic snap post retainers in
the outer box side panel.
Pulling Out The Tail Lamp
3. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors
from the bulb socket.
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise a
quarter turn to unlock it from the housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
6. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb
and housing.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
With Cargo Lamp
1. Remove the two screws holding the
housing/lens to the body as shown.
CHMSL Mounting Screw Locations
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by
touching it with your fingers or by allowing it
to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb
life will result.
6
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Separate the connector holding the housing
and wiring harness to the body.
CHMSL Connector Location
3. Turn the desired bulb socket a quarter turn
and remove the socket and bulb from
housing.
4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the
socket.
CHMSL Bulb And Socket
Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
Inside Bulb: Center High Mounted Stop
Lamp
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of
bulbs and housing.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by
touching it with your fingers or by allowing it
to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb
life will result.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.
Never put any part of your body under a
vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 253
Jack Location
The jack and jack tools are stored under the
front passenger seat.
Removal Of Jack And Tools
To access the jack and jack tools, you must
remove the plastic access cover located on the
side of the front passenger’s seat. To remove
the cover, pull the front part of the cover
(closest to the front of the seat) toward you to
release a locking tab. Once the front of the
cover is loose, slide the cover toward the front
of the seat until it is free from the seat frame.
Jack Access Cover
Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing
bolt counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt
and then slide the assembly out from under the
seat.
Jack And Tools
Release the tool bag straps from the jack and
remove tools from bag.
Jack And Tool Bag
There are two ways to assemble the tools:
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Extension 2
3 — Extension 3
4 — Extension 4
6
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Assembled For Jack Operation
Assembled For Jack Operation
Removing The Spare Tire
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to
jack up the truck. Attach the lug wrench to
the extension tubes with the curved angle
facing away from the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The lug wrench can only be attached to
extension 2.
When attaching the tool to the winch mech-
anism be sure the large flared end opening
on extension 4 is positioned correctly over
the winch mechanism adjusting nut.
Damage to the lug wrench, extensions and
winch mechanism may occur from
improper tool assembly.
1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Extension 2
3 — Extension 3
4 — Extension 4
5 — Extension With Jack Hook
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall
them in the original carrier and location.
While driving you may experience abrupt
stopping, rapid acceleration or sharp turns. A
loose jack, tools, bracket or other objects in
the vehicle may move around with force,
resulting in serious injury.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 255
2. Remove the protective cover over the
access hole for the winch mechanism by
sliding the cover upward.
Access Hole Cover Location
3. Insert the extension tube through the
access hole between the lower tailgate and
the top of the bumper and into the winch
mechanism tube.
Winch Mechanism Tube
Inserting The Extension Tubes Into The Access Hole
4. Rotate the lug wrench handle counter-
clockwise until the spare tire is on the
ground with enough cable slack to allow you
to pull it out from under the vehicle.
Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle
5. Pull the spare tire out from under the
vehicle to gain access to the spare tire
retainer.
Removing The Spare Tire
6
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
6. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of
the cable.
Gaining Access To The Retainer
7. Pull the retainer through the center of the
wheel.
Pulling The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the extension tubes only. Use of an air wrench
or other power tools is not recommended and
can damage the winch.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Shift the transmission into Park (P).
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 257
Jack Warning Label
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from
the stored location.
2. Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel nuts
(but do not remove), by turning them
counterclockwise one turn while the wheel
is still on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Connect the jack handle driver to the
extension, then to the lug wrench.
4. Placement of the jack is critical:
NOTE:
Keep the jack and tools aligned with raising the
vehicle.
Jack / Extensions Placement
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
are securely stowed, spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
6
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Front Jacking Location
There is a jack location indicator on the rear
portion of the front lower control arm.
Front Lifting Point
When changing a front wheel, place the
scissor jack under the rear portion of the
lower control arm as shown below.
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Location
Operate the jack using the extension with
jack hook and the lug wrench. The exten-
sion tubes may be used but is not required.
Rear Lifting Point
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the
extension with jack hook to the jack and
connect the extension tubes. Place the jack
under the axle between the wheel and the
shock bracket with the extension with jack
hook extending to the rear.
Rear Jacking Location
CAUTION!
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make
sure that the jack will not damage
surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack
position as required.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 259
5. By rotating the lug wrench clockwise, raise
the vehicle until the wheel just clears the
surface.
6. Remove the lug nuts and pull the wheel off.
Install the spare wheel and lug nuts with the
cone shaped end of the lug nuts toward the
wheel. Hand tighten the lug nuts with the
vehicle lifted. To avoid the risk of forcing the
vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the
lug nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.
7. Lower vehicle to ground, finish tightening
the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench
while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star
pattern until each nut has been tightened
twice. For the correct lug nut torque refer to
“Wheel And Tire Torque Specifications” in
“Technical Specifications”.
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or service station.
8. If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel
center cap, install the cap and remove the
wheel blocks. Do not install chrome or
aluminum wheel center caps on the spare
wheel. This may result in cap damage.
9. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.
Stow the replaced tire, and secure the jack
and tools in the proper location.
10. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE:
Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
To Stow The Flat Or Spare
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels
cannot be stored under the vehicle because the
wheel retainer will not fit through the wheel pilot
hole. Secure the flat tire in the bed of the truck.
Have the flat tire repaired or replaced immedi-
ately.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off
the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop, could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
6
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is
facing the ground and toward the rear of
the vehicle for convenience in checking the
spare tire inflation. Slide the wheel retainer
through the center of the wheel.
Reinstalling The Retainer
2. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of
the cable and position it properly across the
wheel opening.
Pushing The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel
And Positioning It
3. Remove the extension with the hook and
reattach the short extension 5. Attach the
lug wrench to the extension tubes with the
curved angle facing away from the vehicle.
Insert the extension tubes through the
access hole between the lower tailgate and
the top of the bumper and into the winch
mechanism tube.
Raising The Spare Tire
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 261
4. Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise
until the wheel is drawn into place against
the underside of the vehicle. Continue to
rotate until you feel the winch mechanism
slip, or click three or four times. It cannot be
overtightened. Push against the tire several
times to ensure it is firmly in place.
Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or
other power tools is not recommended and can
damage the winch.
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by
turning the jack turn-screw counter-
clockwise until the jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tool bag. Make sure
the lug wrench is under the jack near the
jack turn-screw.
Jack And Tool Bag
3. Secure the tool bag straps to the jack.
Jack And Tools Tied
4. Place the jack and tools in the storage
position holding the jack by the jack
turn-screw, slip the jack and tools under the
seat so that the bottom slot engages into
the fastener on the floor.
NOTE:
Ensure that the jack slides into the front hold
down location.
6
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the
floor pan. Reinstall the plastic cover.
Jack And Tools
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front
of the engine compartment, behind the left
headlight assembly.
NOTE:
The positive battery post may be covered with a
protective cap if equipped. Lift up on the cap to
gain access to the positive battery post. Do not
jump off fuses. Only jump directly off positive
post which has a positive (+) symbol on or
around the post.
Positive Jumping Location
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall
them in the original carrier and location.
While driving you may experience abrupt
stopping, rapid acceleration or sharp turns. A
loose jack, tools, bracket or other objects in
the vehicle may move around with force,
resulting in serious injury.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 263
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the
automatic transmission into PARK (P) and
turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all
unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, apply the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
Jump Starting Procedure
Connecting The Jumper Cables
Jumper Cable Connections
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
NOTE:
Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off
positive post.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You
could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
6
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground
(exposed metal part of the discharged
vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the
jumper cables in the reverse sequence.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the
jumper cable from the engine ground of
the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of
the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post
of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and
charging system inspected at an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause the
battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground
point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
CAUTION!
Do not connect jumper cable to any of the
fuses on the positive battery terminal. The
resulting electrical current will blow the fuse.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 265
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase
the engine idle speed while preventing
vehicle motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 - SPEED
TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature
gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and
call for service.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying
the parking brake before activating the
Manual Park Release. In addition, you should
be seated in the driver’s seat with your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when activating the
Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual
Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll
away if it is not secured by the parking brake,
or by proper connection to a tow vehicle.
Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury
or death for those in or around the vehicle.
6
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
To push or tow the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such
as a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release
is available.
Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park
Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal
while seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Apply the parking brake, if possible.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
remove the Manual Park Release access
cover, which is located to the lower left of
the steering column.
Manual Park Release Access Cover
4. Behind the Manual Park Release access
cover is the orange tether strap. Insert
Screwdriver or similar tool to unlock locking
tab. Push locking tab up to unlock. Pull the
tether strap out as far as it will go, then
release it. The tether and lever will remain
outside of the trim panel and the
transmission should now be NEUTRAL,
allowing the vehicle to be moved.
Manual Park Release Lever Locking Tab
Manual Park Release Tether
NOTE:
When the lever is locked in the released posi-
tion the access cannot be reinstalled.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal
while seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Pull the tether strap out again, then
release it.
3. Allow the tether strap to retract with the
lever back to its original position.
4. Verify that the transmission is in PARK.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 267
5. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully
and re-install the access cover.If the access
cover cannot be reinstalled, repeat step 1
through 4.
6. Re-install the access cover.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Then
shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and
REVERSE (R), while gently pressing the
accelerator. Use the least amount of
accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain
the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels
or racing the engine.
NOTE:
For trucks equipped with 8-speed automatic
transmission: Shifts between DRIVE (D) and
REVERSE (R) can only be achieved at wheel
speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the
transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more
than two seconds, you must press the brake
pedal to engage DRIVE(D) or REVERSE (R).
NOTE:
Push the “ESC OFF” switch, to place the Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial
Off” mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Safety”
for further information. Once the vehicle has
been freed, push the “ESC OFF” switch again to
restore “ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle
and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of clutch or transmission
failure during prolonged efforts to free a
stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do
not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph
(24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission over-
heating and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
shifting occurring).
6
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable,
disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in the “Starting And Operating” section.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow
bars and other equipment designed for this
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to
bumpers or associated brackets. State and
local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be
observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC
mode.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's
battery is discharged, refer to ”Manual Park
Release” or “Gear Selector Override” in this
section for instructions on shifting the
automatic transmission out of PARK for towing.
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The
Ground
2WD Models 4WD Models
Flat Tow NONE
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL (N)
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance (6–speed
transmission)
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance (8–speed
transmission)
See instructions in “Recreational Towing (Behind
Motorhome, Etc.)” under “Starting And Operating”
• Automatic Transmission in PARK (P)
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
sion components. Damage to your vehicle
may result from improper towing.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 269
Two-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your
vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground
using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, the vehicle may be
towed (with rear wheels ON the ground) under
the following conditions:
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N).
Refer to “Manual Park Release” in this
section for instructions on shifting the
8–speed transmission to NEUTRAL (N) when
the engine is OFF.
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h).
The towing distance must not exceed
15 miles (24 km) for 6–speed transmission,
or 30 miles (48 km) for 8–speed transmis-
sion.
If the transmission is not operable, or the
vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) or farther than 15 miles (24 km) for
6–speed transmission, or 30 miles (48 km) for
8–speed transmission, tow with the rear wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow
the vehicle on a flatbed, or with the front wheels
raised and the rear wheels on a towing dolly, or
(when using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer
to hold the front wheels in the straight position)
with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels
ON the ground.
Four-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all
wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods
are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one
end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a
towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transfer case is operable, the vehicle may be
towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels
on the ground), IF the transfer case is in
NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is in PARK
(P). Refer to “Recreational Towing (Behind
Motorhome, Etc.)” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information and detailed
instructions.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe engine and/
or transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or
transfer case will occur if a front or rear
wheel lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
6
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency
tow hooks.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk
of damage to the vehicle.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the
Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS)
function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed under
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such
as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the Event
Data Recorder (EDR).
WARNING!
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious
injury or death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with
tow hooks. Tow straps may become disen-
gaged, causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to
rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not
use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or
highway towing. You could damage your
vehicle.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
271
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is time to
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, and extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the
“Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as
3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change.
If a scheduled oil change is performed by
someone other than an authorized dealer, the
message can be reset by referring to the steps
described under “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Severe Duty
NOTE:
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off-road environment or
is operated predominantly at idle, or only very
low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check tire pressure and look for unusual
wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign
of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the
oil indicator system turns on
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder and fill as needed
Check function of all interior and exterior
lights
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Plan on the following
pages for required maintenance. More frequent
maintenance may be needed in severe
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short
trip driving. In some extreme conditions,
additional maintenance not specified in the
maintenance schedule may be required.
7
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change the oil and filter.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid if equipped with dipstick.
Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system.
Inspect the engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions, replace engine air cleaner filter if necessary.
Inspect and replace the Evaporative System Fresh Air Filter as necessary, replacement may be more frequent if vehicle is operated in extreme dusty
conditions.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 273
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle
surfaces. If gear oil leakage is
suspected, check the fluid level. If
using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing,
change axle fluid.
X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as
necessary.
X X X X X X X
7
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Adjust parking brake as necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant
at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 275
(Continued)
Inspect the transfer case fluid, change
for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
X X
Change the transfer case fluid. X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an
accident.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L Engine
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Battery
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 277
5.7L Engine
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
5 — Battery
7
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Checking Oil Level — Gas Engine
To ensure proper lubrication of your vehicle's
engine, the engine oil must be maintained at
the correct level. Check the oil level at regular
intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time
to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is
shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings. Always maintain the oil level within
the SAFE zone on the dipstick. Adding one quart
of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the
SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of
the safe zone on these engines.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir is located under the hood
and should be checked for fluid level at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or
towel and wipe the wiper blades clean. This will
help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
range of your climate. This rating information
can be found on most washer fluid containers.
After the engine has warmed up, operate the
defroster for a few minutes to reduce the
possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on
the cold windshield. Windshield washer solution
used with water as directed on the container,
aids cleaning action, reduces the freezing point
to avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to
paint or trim.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a
maintenance-free battery. You will never have
to add water, nor is periodic maintenance
required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could
damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling
or working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes
or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump
Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 279
Pressure Washing
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could
result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Engine Oil — Gas Engine
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you
that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance. Refer to the
“Maintenance Plan” in this chapter for further
information.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the nega-
tive cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and
negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the
pressures generated by these machines is
such that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
proper equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
7
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Oil Selection — 3.6L/5.7L
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends engine oils
that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395.
NOTE:
Hemi engines (5.7L) at times can tick right after
startup and then quiet down after approxi-
mately 30 seconds. This is normal and will not
harm the engine. This characteristic can be
caused by short drive cycles. For example, if the
vehicle is started then shut off after driving a
short distance. Upon restarting, you may experi-
ence a ticking sound. Other causes could be if
the vehicle is unused for an extended period of
time, incorrect oil, extended oil changes or
extended idling. If the engine continues to tick
or if the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes
on, see the nearest authorized dealer.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil,
Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all
operating temperatures. This engine oil
improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the
recommended engine oil viscosity for your
engine. For information on engine oil filler cap
location, refer to the “Engine Compartment”
illustration in this chapter.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 5.7L
Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil,
Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all
operating temperatures. This engine oil
improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the
recommended engine oil viscosity for your
engine. For information on engine oil filler cap
location, refer to the “Engine Compartment”
illustration in this chapter.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
as the chemicals can damage your engine.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 281
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals
for oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against the addition of any additives (other than
leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil
is an engineered product and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact
an authorized dealer, service station or
governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely
discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow
type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type
for replacement. The quality of replacement
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to ensure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality
oil filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this chapter
for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to ensure most efficient
service. Mopar engine air cleaner filters are a
high quality filter and are recommended.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove
the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal
injury.
7
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or
debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or
debris you should change your air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Release the spring clips from the air
cleaner cover.
3.6L/5.7L Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air
cleaner filter.
Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from
the housing assembly.
Air Cleaner Filter
1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
2 — Air Hose
3 — Spring Clips
1 — Air Cleaner Cover
2 — Air Cleaner Filter
1 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 283
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the
housing assembly with the air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the
housing assembly locating tabs.
3. Latch the spring clips and lock the air
cleaner cover to the housing assembly.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air
conditioner should be checked and serviced by
an authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a
— If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an
ozone-friendly substance. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
Polyalkylene Glycol (PAG) compressor oil and
refrigerants.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for
your air conditioning system. Some unap-
proved refrigerants are flammable and can
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
Refer to Warranty Information Book, for
further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf — If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer using
recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Filter Replacement (A/C Air Filter)
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this chapter
for the proper maintenance intervals.
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the
following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove
all contents.
2. With the glove compartment door open,
remove the glove compartment tension
tether and tether clip by sliding the clip
toward the face of the glove compartment
door. Lift the clip out of glove compartment
door and release into dash panel.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
3. There are glove compartment travel stops
on both sides of the glove compartment
door, push inward on both sides of the glove
compartment to release the glove
compartment travel stops.
Glove Compartment
4. Disengage the glove compartment door
from its hinges by opening the glove
compartment past the travel stop and
pulling it toward you.
1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 285
5. Remove the filter cover by pushing in on the
finger tabs on each end of the filter cover.
Filter Cover
Finger Tabs
Finger Tab
6. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it
straight out of the housing.
Cabin Air Filter
7. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on
the filter pointing toward the floor. When
installing the filter cover, press on each end
until you hear an audible click.
8. Reinstall the glove compartment on the
hinges.
Glove Compartment Installation
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow
to indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result
in the need to replace it more often.
7
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
9. Pull the tension tether outward and reinstall
the glove compartment past the travel stops
by pushing in on the glove compartment
sides.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully
engaged.
10. Reattach the glove compartment tension
tether by inserting the tether clip in the
glove compartment and sliding the clip
away from the face of the glove
compartment door.
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across the ribbed surface of a
belt from rib to rib, are considered normal.
These are not a reason to replace the belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across)
are not normal. Any belt with cracks running
along a rib must be replaced. Also have the belt
replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords,
or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has sepa-
rated from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between
two ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken (note: identify and correct
problem before new belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or
rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in
operation)
1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory
drive belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could
be injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a compe-
tent mechanic.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 287
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools, we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding
doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
periodically with a lithium based grease, such
as Mopar Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant,
the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess
oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When
performing other underhood services, the hood
latch release mechanism, and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and
Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality
lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder
Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft
cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber
out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies
depending on geographical area and frequency
of use. Poor performance of blades may be
present with chattering, marks, water lines or
wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged,
replace the affected wiper blade or arm with a
new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper blade
or arm that is damaged.
7
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the
full up position.
Windshield Wiper Arm And Blade
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, flip up the locking tab.
Wiper Locking Assembly
3. Tilt the lower end of the wiper blade away
from the arm and use one finger push the
release tab toward the wiper arm.
Wiper Disengaging
4. Slide the wiper blade down towards the
base of the wiper arm.
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Locking Tab
2 — Wiper
3 — Release Tab
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 289
(Continued)
5. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove
the wiper blade from the wiper arm by
holding the wiper arm with one hand and
separating the wiper blade from the wiper
arm with the other hand (move the wiper
blade down toward the base of the wiper
arm and away from the J hook in the end of
the wiper arm).
Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm
6. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on
the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper
locking tab open.
3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper
assembly into the hook on the tip of the arm
through the opening in the wiper blade
under the locking tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on
the wiper arm until it is latched
(engagement will be accompanied by an
audible click). Fold down the latch release
tab and snap it into its locked position.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the
exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle; or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or
oil change. Replace as required.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm J Hook
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to
“Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further
information.
7
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Under normal operating conditions, the
catalytic converter will not require
maintenance. However, it is important to keep
the engine properly tuned to ensure proper
catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching
odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's
specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the trans-
mission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition
components disconnected or removed, such
as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
periods during very rough idle or malfunc-
tioning operating conditions.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do
not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
an emissions control device and may seri-
ously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
WARNING! (Continued)
Damage to the catalytic converter can
result if your vehicle is not kept in proper
operating condition. In the event of engine
malfunction, particularly involving engine
misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced
promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could
cause the converter to overheat, resulting
in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 291
Cooling System Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze)
protection every 12 months (before the onset of
freezing weather, where applicable). If the
engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check
the front of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or
radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from
a garden hose vertically down the face of the A/
C condenser (if equipped) or the back of the
radiator core.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and
tightness of the connection at the coolant
recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks.
DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant (anitfreeze) properly. Failure to fill these
systems properly could lead to severe internal
engine damage. If any coolant (antifreeze) is
needed to be added to the system please
contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant
(antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this chapter
for the proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-
cally and may start at any time, whether the
engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
7
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result
in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant is different and should
not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive
Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant
(antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system
will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled
with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not
use additional rust inhibitors or antirust prod-
ucts, as they may not be compatible with the
radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for
using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze) that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant
(antifreeze):
We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled
water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an
authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/
engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use
of lower quality water will reduce the amount
of corrosion protection in the engine cooling
system.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 293
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in
the area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is
not recommended and can result in cooling
system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are
mixed in an emergency, have a authorized
dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to
the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/
recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on
the sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze)
is a regulated substance requiring proper
disposal. Check with your local authorities to
determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain
in puddles on the ground.
If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency
assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
7
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Checking Coolant Level — 3.6L and 5.7L
Engines
With the engine off and cold, the level of the
engine coolant should be between the ADD and
SAFE range on the dipstick.
To check the coolant level:
1. Open the coolant reservoir.
Opening The Coolant Reservoir
2. Lift and remove the plastic dipstick from the
reservoir neck.
Coolant Reservoir Dipstick
3. Check the coolant level on the dipstick.
The radiator normally remains completely full,
so there is no need to remove the radiator cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze)
freeze point or replacing engine coolant
(antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of
this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle
need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is
needed to maintain the proper level, it should
be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compart-
ment. This is normally a result of moisture from
rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on
the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-
mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the
contents of the coolant expansion bottle
must also be protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) addi-
tions are required, the cooling system should
be pressure tested for leaks.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 295
(Continued)
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concen-
tration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) and distilled
water for proper corrosion protection of your
engine which contains aluminum compo-
nents.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
keep the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever
necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther-
mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis-
factory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and
increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to ensure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be
inspected periodically. Refer to the
“Maintenance Plan” in this chapter for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be
checked when performing under the hood
service or immediately if the brake system
warning lamp indicates system failure.
The brake master cylinder has a translucent
plastic reservoir. On the outboard side of the
reservoir, there is a “MAX” mark and a “MIN”
mark. The fluid level must be kept within these
two marks. Do not add fluid above the MAX
mark because leakage may occur at the cap.
With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected
to fall as the brake linings wear. However, an
unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by
a leak and a system check should be
conducted.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot
resting or riding on the brake pedal can result
in abnormally high brake temperatures,
excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended
brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubri-
cants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information. Using the wrong type of
brake fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reser-
voir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or
fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container. Keep the master cylinder reser-
voir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from
the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This
may cause it to boil unexpectedly during
hard or prolonged braking, resulting in
sudden brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
7
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission
fluid to ensure optimum transmission
performance and life. Use only the
manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications”. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant
should be used.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against using any special additives in the
transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid
(ATF) is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid
additives to the transmission. The only
exception to this policy is the use of special dyes
for diagnosing fluid leaks in six-speed
transmissions. Avoid using transmission
sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required, therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service
tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an
improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may
cause deterioration in transmission shift
quality and/or torque converter shudder, and
will require more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for fluid
specifications.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage
your transmission components. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 297
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not
required. However, change the fluid and filter if
the fluid becomes contaminated (with water,
etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
any reason.
Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid
Level
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks
are not required. When the vehicle is serviced
for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the
axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil
leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
This inspection should be made with the vehicle
in a level position.The fluid level should be even
with the bottom of the fill hole (within 1/4 inch
(6.4 mm) of edge of hole) for the FDU215 HD
front axle and C235FE rear axle.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specification” for further information.
NOTE:
The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differ-
ential components. Operation of the vehicle in
water, as may be encountered in some
off-highway types of service, will require
draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
Limited-Slip Differentials
If equipped with a Limited Slip Differential it will
require that 5 oz. (148 ml) of Mopar Limited Slip
Additive be added to the gear lubricant. Refer to
“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specification” for further information.
The Mopar Limited Slip Additive should be
added to the gear lubricant whenever a fluid
change is made to an axle equipped with a
Limited Slip Differential.
NOTE:
When refilling an axle with a Limited Slip Differ-
ential, (which requires a Limited Slip Additive),
the Limited Slip Additive should be added
before the gear lubricant is added to insure
proper additive fill.
Drain And Refill
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this chapter
for the proper maintenance intervals.
Transfer Case
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended
fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for further
information.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An
authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
7
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fluid Level Check
This fluid level can be checked by removing the
filler plug. The fluid level should be to the
bottom edge of the filler plug hole (or at least
within 1/8 inch of the bottom) with the vehicle
in a level position.
Drain And Refill
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this chapter
for the proper maintenance intervals.
HOISTING
A conventional floor jack may be used at the
jacking locations. Refer to the graphics that
show jacking locations. However, a floor jack or
frame hoist must never be used on any other
parts of the underbody.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
CAUTION!
Never use a floor jack directly under the
differential housing of a loaded truck or
damage to your vehicle may result.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-
ture Grades
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 299
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size desig-
nation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning
with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for
the letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
7
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 301
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The Tire Identification Number (TIN) may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white
sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black
sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured.
Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
7
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity,
the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 303
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the
“Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
7
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle
loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle
Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”
chapter of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions
of your vehicle, locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 295 kg
(635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples
on how to calculate total load, cargo/
luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table
is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load carry
capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 305
7
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a
comfortable ride. Overinflation produces a
jarring and uncomfortable ride.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
vehicle handling, and increase your stopping
distance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload
them.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 307
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure build up or your tire
pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is
very important.
Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle
operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment vehicle dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve
stem.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
7
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire
of identical size and service description (Load
Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire
pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to
be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss
of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.
A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a run flat tire is changed after
driving with underinflated tire condition, please
replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to
be reused when driven under run flat mode
14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
The TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving
the vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended to drive a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice
conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 309
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining
when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to develop across the tire tread. These
abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well
when installing new tires due to wear and tear
in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires
equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is needed.
Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear
Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle
Certification Label for the size designation of
your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for
your tire will be found on the original equipment
tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the
“Tire Safety Information” section of this manual
for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result
in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
7
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall.
Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in
sets of four; failure to do so may adversely
affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
proved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedometer
and odometer readings.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice
conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too
fast for conditions also creates the possibility
of loss of vehicle control.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 311
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at
sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer
for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of
non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire
Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in
“Starting And Operating” for restrictions when
towing with a spare tire designated for
temporary emergency use.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle.
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation
for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the
recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin
with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than
one compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with a compact or limited use
temporary spare installed. Damage to the
vehicle may result.
7
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary
emergency use only. You can identify if your
vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by
looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump
before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the collapsible spare
wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically
for the collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire may look like the originally
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full
size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is
not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
label located on the limited use spare wheel.
This label contains the driving limitations for
this spare. This tire may look like the original
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited
use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it
is not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 313
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent
corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the
vehicle and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the
wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive,
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels
with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
the brakes to remove the water droplets from
the brake components. This activity will remove
the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
drive more than the speed listed on the
limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
so could result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel's protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
7
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
Tire Chains and Traction Devices
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance,
the following traction devices are
recommended. Follow these recommendations
to guard against damage.
Traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the traction device
manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use
with a tire chain or traction device.
Install on rear tires only.
For a P265/70R17 tire, use of a snow trac-
tion device with a maximum projection of a
S-class snow chain beyond the tire profile is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds.
They will permanently damage this finish and
such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that
is required to maintain this finish.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can
cause unpredictable handling. You could lose
control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only trac-
tion devices in good condition are used.
Broken devices can cause serious damage.
Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device
before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km). Autosock traction devices do not
require retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed
of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 315
Tire Rotation Recommendations
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, driving, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on all season type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow
and wet traction levels and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this chapter
for the proper maintenance intervals. More
frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The
reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward
cross” shown in the following diagram. This
rotation pattern does not apply to some
directional tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half times
as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
7
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than
21 days, we recommend that you take the
following steps to minimize the drain on your
vehicle's battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out
of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or
more, run the air conditioning system at idle
for about five minutes in the fresh air and
high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
that make roads passable in snow and ice and
those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 317
(Continued)
Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to
airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which
the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold
weather and other extreme conditions will have
an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or
removal of paint and protective coatings from
your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
Stone and gravel impact
Insects, tree sap and tar
Salt in the air near seacoast localities
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass
headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive
material to clean the lenses.
Tri-Fold Soft Tonneau Cover Care
For cleaning and protecting the vinyl Tri-Fold
Tonneau cover, use Mopar Whitewall & Vinyl
Top Cleaner and Mopar Leather and Vinyl
Conditioner/Protectant.
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the
panels completely with clear water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to
remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish. Take
care never to scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder that will scratch metal and painted
surfaces.
7
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
318 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Bumper Care
The customer is responsible to clean and
maintain the chrome components of the
vehicle. Washing away road debris and salt
using an automotive soap. Bumpers should be
cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap
and water to maintain their luster and to
prevent corrosion.
Your bumpers are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff
brush. They can stain or damage the protective
coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-
riage at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
trunk be kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately. The
cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs
is considered the responsibility of the owner.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a
bristle brush, metal polishes, or oven
cleaner. These products may damage the
bumper’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar
Chrome Cleaner, or equivalent is
recommended.
Avoid products or automatic car washes
that use acidic solutions, strong alkaline
additives, or harsh brushes. Many after-
market cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the bumper’s protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car
wash soap, Mopar Chrome Cleaner, or
equivalent is recommended.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 319
Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
Spray-On Bedliner – If Equipped
During ownership, the shine and luster of the
Spray-On Bedliner can fade from oxidation, road
dirt, heavy-duty hauling and hard water stains.
Weathering and Ultra-Violet (UV) exposure will
lead to fading, dulling, and loss of gloss over
time.
To help maintain the appearance of your
Spray-On Bedliner, the manufacturer
recommends you periodically rinse all loose dirt
from your truck bed and clean your truck at
least twice per year using the Mopar Spray-On
Bedliner Conditioner available at your local
authorized dealer.
To Help Maintain The Appearance Of Your
Spray-On Bedliner, Follow The Steps Below:
1. Rinse your truck bed out with water to
remove any loose dirt and debris.
2. Mix a mild soap or detergent with water, and
clean truck bed with a soft cloth or brush.
3. Rinse bedliner with water.
4. Once dry, apply a small amount of Mopar
Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner to a moist
towel or sponge and wipe over the entire
surface of the truck bedliner.
Spray-On Bedliners are chemically-resistant to
many different types of chemicals (including
gasoline, oil, hydraulic fluids) for short periods
of time. If a spill occurs on your Spray-On
Bedliner, rinse the truck out as soon as possible
to avoid permanent damage.
Repairing The Spray-On Bedliner
While extremely tough, it is possible to damage
a Spray-On Bedliner. One common condition is
when loading a heavy pallet and dragging that
pallet across the floor of the bed. If a nail or
sharp point is exposed under the weight of the
pallet a scratch or tear is possible.
While not covered by your new vehicle warranty,
a cosmetic fix to cover the metal exposed by the
scratch is required. To repair a tear or gouge,
follow the directions provided in the Mopar
Quick Repair Kit.
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the
following manner:
Remove as much of the stain as possible by
blotting with a clean, dry towel.
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp
towel.
WARNING!
Do not use silicon-based protection products
to clean your bedliner. Silicon-based products
can become slippery and may result in
personal injury.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
7
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or
a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth
and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other
form of protectants on Stain Repel products.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a
soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
or if the buckles do not work properly.
NOTE:
If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper
turning loop for soiling. If soiling is present,
clean with a wet soft cloth until all residue is
removed.
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent
retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-
tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated
surfaces of the interior may cause perma-
nent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 321
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap
solution may be used, but do not use high
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If
soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved
by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.
Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive
and damage the leather upholstery and should
be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft
cloth and Mopar Total Clean.
Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not
use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to
clean your leather upholstery. Application of a
leather conditioner is not required to maintain
the original condition.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather
is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom-
mends Mopar total care leather cleaner applied
on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution
when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped
with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the
elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean
leather seats, as damage to the seat may
result.
7
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
322
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found
on the left front corner of the instrument panel,
visible through the windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
If power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the
engine off), the brakes will still function.
However, you will experience a substantial
increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle.
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses
normal braking capability, the remaining
system will still function with some loss of
overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during
application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and activation of the “Brake Warning
Light” and the “ABS Warning Light” (if equipped)
during brake use.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/
bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a high quality six
sided (hex) deep wall socket.
Torque Specifications
**Use only authorized dealer recommended
lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or
oil before tightening.
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Torque
Lug Nut/
Bolt Type
**Lug
Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
130
Ft-Lbs
(176 N·m)
Cone
M14 x
1.50
22 mm
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 323
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/
bolt (do not insert it halfway).
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
Four And Five Lug Nuts/Bolts Torque Pattern
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
excellent fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality
unleaded “Regular” gasoline having an octane
rating of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/
2 method. The use of higher octane “Premium”
gasoline will not provide any benefit over
“Regular” gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see your dealer immediately.
Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void
or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
8
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323
324 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
5.7L Engine
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality
unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87
to 89 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The
use of 89 octane “Plus” gasoline is recommended
for optimum performance and fuel economy.
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see your dealer immediately.
Use of gasoline with an octane number lower than
87 can cause engine failure and may void or not
be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformulated
gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle
emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is
recommended. Properly blended reformulated
gasoline will provide improved performance
and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline contains a higher level of
detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended.
Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish
removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 325
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline
with oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void
or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on
Poor engine performance
Poor cold start and cold drivability
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid
Propane (LP) may result in damage to the
engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic
additive that is blended into some gasoline to
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The
manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing
methanol, or gasoline containing more than
15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may
result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe
pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
8
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325
326 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
The MMT content of gasoline may not be
indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you
should ask your gasoline retailer whether the
gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in
Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
Fuel System Cautions
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions
control system can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
impair engine performance and damage
the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni-
tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a
pungent burning odor or some light smoke,
your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-
tioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products
contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsi-
bility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to
prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 327
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Regular Cab Shortbed/Crew Quad Cab Models 26 Gallons 98 Liters
Regular Cab Longbed/Crew Quad Cab Models (Optional) 32 Gallons 121 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (We recommend you use SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7L Engine (We recommend you use SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System
3.6L Engine (We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032.)
13.7 Quarts 13 Liters
5.7L Engine – (We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032.)
18.3 Quarts 17.3 Liters
8
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327
328 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar,
Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct
SAE grade.
Mopar SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil meeting MS-6395 is
not available.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar,
Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct
SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar brand Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method,
0-15% Ethanol.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 329
(Continued)
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze) or any “globally compatible”
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the
cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or
anti-rust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator engine coolant
(antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
CAUTION! (Continued)
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
CAUTION! (Continued)
8
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329
330 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case We recommend you use Mobil LT.
Front Axle
We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant
SAE 75W-85.
Rear Axle
We recommend you use Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-90
(MS-A0160). Limited-Slip Rear Axles require the addition of 5 oz. (148 ml)
Mopar Limited Slip Additive (MS-10111).
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330
331
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect
4/4C/4C NAV with 8.4-inch Display system,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain
security features to reduce the risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle
systems and wireless communications. Vehicle
software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as
needed. Similar to a computer or other devices,
your vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of
the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
systems are breached. It may be possible
that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or
CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
trusted source. Media of unknown origin
could possibly contain malicious software,
and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems
to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331
332 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveucon-
nect.com/support/soft-
ware-update.html (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Resi-
dents) to learn about available Uconnect
software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired
communications cannot be assured. Third
parties may unlawfully intercept information
and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data
Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement or “Onboard Diagnostic
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the
instrument panel. These buttons allow you to
access and change the Customer
Programmable Features. Many features can
vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below
and/or beside the Uconnect system in the
center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on
the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the
center of the control knob one or more times to
select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen
Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Push the Back Arrow button to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332
MULTIMEDIA 333
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 3 Settings
Uconnect 3 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons
On The Faceplate
Push the Settings button to display the settings
menu screen. In this mode, the Uconnect
system allows you to access all of the available
programmable features.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at
a time.
When making a selection, press the button on
the touchscreen to enter the desired menu.
Once in the desired menu, press and release
the preferred setting and make your selection.
Once the setting is selected, press the Back
Arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu. Pressing the Up or
Down Arrow buttons on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
NOTE:
All settings should be changed with the ignition
in the ON/RUN position.
The following tables list the settings that may be
found within the Uconnect 3 radio, along with
the selectable options pertaining to each
setting.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333
334 MULTIMEDIA
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available.
Units — If Equipped
After pressing Units on the touchscreen, the following will be available:
Clock & Date
After pressing the Clock & Date button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Set Language English, Français, Español
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Fuel Saver Display On Off
NOTE:
The “Fuel Saver Display” feature will allow you to enable fuel saver mode and will be displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Time 12 hour 24 hour
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time” feature, press the corresponding arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then select AM or PM.
Set Date Up Arrow Down Arrow
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334
MULTIMEDIA 335
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always With Help Never
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound and Display
NOTE:
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than
7 mph (11 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects.
Front ParkSense Chime Volume Low Med High
Rear ParkSense Chime Volume — If
Equipped
Low Med High
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Tilt Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the exterior side-view mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position and
the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out
of REVERSE.
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335
336 MULTIMEDIA
ParkView Backup Camera Active
Guidelines
On Off
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see active guidelines over the ParkView Backup
Camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution
note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted
into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the
windshield.
Hill Start Assist — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Hill Start Assist” feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system becomes active.
Setting Name Selectable Options
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336
MULTIMEDIA 337
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
Headlight Illumination On
Approach
0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on when
the doors are unlocked with the key fob.
Headlights With Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
Auto Dim High Beams — If
Equipped
On Off
Daytime Running Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. The feature is only available if allowed by
law in the country of the vehicle purchase.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature
may be selected with or without the Sound Horn With Lock feature selected.
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337
338 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK, or NEUTRAL
position, and the driver's door is opened.
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Remote Door Unlock All Driver
NOTE:
The “Remote Door Unlock” feature will allow you to program your remote door locks to open “All doors” or only the “Driver door” with the first push of
the key fob or grabbing the Passive Entry door handle.
Sound Horn With Remote Start On Off
NOTE:
When the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” feature is selected, the horn will sound when the remote start is activated.
Memory Linked To Fob — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Memory Linked To Fob” feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
The seat will return to the memorized seat location if “Memory Linked To Fob” is set to (On) when the key fob is used to unlock the door.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338
MULTIMEDIA 339
Auto-On Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. It automat-
ically unlocks the doors when the outside door handle is grabbed.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature
may be selected with or without the Sound Horn With Lock feature selected.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat &
Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” feature is selected, the driver's heated seat and heated
steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40°F (4.4°C). When temperatures are above 80°F (26.7°C) the driver vented
seat will turn on.
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339
340 MULTIMEDIA
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Trailer Brake
After pressing the Trailer Brake button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Easy Exit Seats — If Equipped On Off
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
Engine Off Power Delay
0 sec 45 sec
5 min 10 min
Auto Entry/Exit — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Trailer Select Trailer 1 Trailer 2 Trailer 3 Trailer 4
Trailer Brake Type Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340
MULTIMEDIA 341
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Front Back Left Right
NOTE:
The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the arrows to adjust; tap the
C icon to readjust to the center.
Equalizer + –
NOTE:
When in the “Equalizer” display, you may adjust the Bass, Mid, and Treble settings.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed.
Surround Sound — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341
342 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
AUX Volume Offset — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Loudness — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Phones List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones” feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. Refer to “Phone Mode” in the “Uconnect 3 With 5-inch
Display” section for further information
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342
MULTIMEDIA 343
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the Channel Skip button on the touch-
screen, and select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info SIRIUS ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration
of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider
online.
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343
344 MULTIMEDIA
Restore Settings
After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the Clear Personal Data Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. If Yes is selected a
pop-up will appear asking, “Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?” select Yes to restore, or Cancel to exit.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets. If Yes is selected a pop-up will appear asking,
“Are you sure you want to clear all personal data?” select Yes to Clear, or Cancel to exit.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344
MULTIMEDIA 345
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Settings
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Touchscreen And
Faceplate Buttons
Press the Apps button, then press the
Settings button on the touchscreen to display
the menu setting screen. In this mode, the
Uconnect system allows you to access all of the
available programmable features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on
the touchscreen to enter the desired menu.
Once in the desired menu, press and release
the preferred setting “option” until a check
mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is
selected, either press the Back Arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu,
or press the X button on the touchscreen to
close out of the settings screen.
Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle
up or down through the available settings.
The following tables list the settings that may be
found within the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV radio,
along with the selectable options pertaining to
each setting.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345
346 MULTIMEDIA
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Français Español
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Display Brightness With Headlights
ON
+ –
NOTE:
To make changes to the “Display Brightness With Headlights ON” setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in
the “party” or “parade” position.
Display Brightness With Headlights
OFF
+ –
NOTE:
To make changes to the “Display Brightness With Headlights OFF” setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in
the “party” or “parade” position.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346
MULTIMEDIA 347
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Set Theme Pre-configured Themes
Units US Metric
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster —
If Equipped
On Off
Controls Screen Time-Out — If
Equipped
On Off
Fuel Saver Display in Cluster — If
Equipped
On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Never w/Help Always
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347
348 MULTIMEDIA
Clock
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Camera
After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped On Off
Set Time Hours – +
Set Time Minutes – +
Time Format
12 hrs 24 hrs
AM PM
Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Show Time In Status Bar” feature allows you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar.
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to
10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission
is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348
MULTIMEDIA 349
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines On Off
NOTE:
The “Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate
the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay
indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sounds and Display
NOTE:
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than
7 mph (11 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects.
Front ParkSense Chime Volume Low Med High
Rear ParkSense Chime Volume — If
Equipped
Low Med High
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Tilt Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the exterior side-view mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position and
the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out
of REVERSE.
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349
350 MULTIMEDIA
ParkView Backup Camera Active
Guidelines
On Off
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see active guidelines over the ParkView Backup
Camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution
note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted
into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the
windshield.
Hill Start Assist — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Hill Start Assist” feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system becomes active.
Setting Name Selectable Options
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350
MULTIMEDIA 351
Mirrors & Wipers
After pressing the Mirror and Wipers button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlights with Wipers On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting
the vehicle.
Headlight Illumination On
Approach
0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the
doors are unlocked with the key fob.
Headlights With Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Headlights With Wipers” feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately
10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351
352 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Auto Dim High Beams — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
Daytime Running Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. The feature is only available if allowed by
law in the country of the vehicle purchase.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lamps will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature
may be selected with or without the Sound Horn With Lock feature selected.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position and the driver's door is opened.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352
MULTIMEDIA 353
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the front and rear turn signals flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob.
This feature may be selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote Start On Off
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors
NOTE:
When “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door unlocks on the first press of the key fob unlock button.
You must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passengers’ doors.
When “All Doors” is programmed, all of the doors unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button.
If the vehicle is programmed “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: All Doors”, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle
is grasped. If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped.
With Passive Entry, if “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed pushing the handle more than once only results in the driver’s
door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver’s door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or
use key fob).
Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353
354 MULTIMEDIA
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Personal Settings Linked To Key
Fob — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting
the vehicle.
The seat returns to the memorized seat location (if “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” is set to On) when the key fob is used to unlock the door.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Engine Off Power Delay + –
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting
the vehicle.
Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, the driver’s seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354
MULTIMEDIA 355
Trailer Brake
After pressing the Trailer Brake button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Trailer Select Trailer 1 Trailer 2 Trailer 3 Trailer 4
Trailer Brake Type Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Front Back Left Right
NOTE:
The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the arrows to adjust, tap the
C icon to readjust to the center.
Equalizer + –
NOTE:
When in the “Equalizer” display you may adjust the Bass, Mid, and Treble settings.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed.
Surround Sound — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355
356 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth® Settings
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
AUX Volume Offset — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Auto Play On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Do Not Disturb List of Settings
NOTE:
Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (Both, Text, Call), Auto Reply Message (Custom, Default),
and Custom Auto Reply Message (Create Message).
Paired Phones and Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones and Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones and Audio Devices” feature shows which phones and audio sources are paired to the Phone and Audio Sources Settings system.
Refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for further information.
Smartphone Projection Manager On Off
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356
MULTIMEDIA 357
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the 12 presets, so you
can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background,
so you will not even realize it's on, except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while
scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info SIRIUS ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration
of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider
online.
SiriusXM® Travel Link is a separate subscription.
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357
358 MULTIMEDIA
Reset Settings
After pressing the Reset Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
System Information — If Equipped
After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Reset App Drawer OK Cancel
Restore Settings OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Software License System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When the “Software License” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying the system software version.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358
MULTIMEDIA 359
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Ensure that all persons read this manual
carefully before using the system. It contains
instructions on how to use the system in a safe
and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
Doing so can result in damage to the
touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety
precautions. Failure to do so may result in injury
or property damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so.
If prolonged viewing of the screen is required,
park in a safe location and set the parking
brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage
to the product. Return it to an authorized
dealer for repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set
to a level that still allows you to hear outside
traffic and emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
Read all instructions in this manual carefully
before using your system to ensure proper
usage.
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
tronic device. Do not let young children use
the system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or the system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on
the system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of mois-
ture away from the system. Besides damage
to the system, moisture can cause electric
shocks as with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed depen-
dent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
Exposure To Radio Frequency Radiation
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community. The
radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359
360 MULTIMEDIA
Care And Maintenance
Touchscreen
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard
or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry,
etc.), which could scratch the touchscreen
surface!
Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals
directly on the screen! Use a clean and dry
microfiber lens cleaning cloth in order to
clean the touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water
solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the
solvent manufacturer's precautions and
directions.
UCONNECT 3.0
Introduction
Uconnect 3.0
1 — RADIO
Push the RADIO button on the faceplate to enter
the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes; AM,
FM, and SXM (if equipped) can be selected by
pushing the RADIO button on the faceplate until
the desired tuner mode is displayed.
2 — PHONE PICK UP
Push the PHONE PICK UP button to initiate or
answer a phone call, send or receive a text.
3 — PHONE HANG UP
Push the PHONE HANG UP button to end a call.
4 — ENTER/BROWSE & TUNE/SCROLL
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button to accept a
highlighted selection on the screen. Rotate the
TUNE/SCROLL knob to scroll through a list or
tune a radio station.
5 — SEEK UP
Push the SEEK UP button on the faceplate to
tune the radio to the next listenable station or
channel.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360
MULTIMEDIA 361
6 — PLAY/PAUSE/MUTE
Push to Play, Pause or Mute music or Mute an
active phone call.
7 — BACK
Push the BACK button on the faceplate to return
to a previous menu or screen.
8 — MENU
Push the MENU button on the faceplate to scroll
between the setting submenus.
9 — AUDIO
Push the AUDIO button on the faceplate to
adjust the Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance or
Fade.
10 — SEEK DOWN
Push the SEEK DOWN button on the faceplate
to tune the radio to the previous listenable
station or channel.
11 — ON/VOLUME
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on
the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a
second time to turn off the radio.
The volume control turns continuously
(360 degrees) in either direction without
stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob
to the right increases the volume and to the left
decreases it.
12 — PRESETS 1–6
These buttons on the faceplate tune the radio to
the stations that you commit to memory AM (A,
B, C), FM (A, B, C) and Satellite (A, B, C) — 15 AM,
15 FM and 15 SAT stations.
13 — MEDIA
Pushing the MEDIA button on the faceplate will
allow you to switch from AM/FM/SXM modes to
Media mode (CD – if equipped, USB/iPod®/
AUX).
Radio Mode
Operating Radio Mode
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
FM
AM
SXM SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
Push the RADIO button on the faceplate to enter
the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes; AM,
FM, and SXM, can then be selected by pushing
the RADIO button until the desired tuner mode
is displayed.
Switching The System ON/OFF
Push the ON/OFF Volume Control knob to turn
on the radio. Push the ON/OFF Volume Control
knob a second time to turn off the radio.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound
will be set at the same volume level as last
played.
Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns
continuously (360 degrees) in either direction
without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME
control knob to the right increases the volume
and to the left decreases it.
Enter/Browse And Tune/Scroll Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency.
When scrolling through a list, push the ENTER/
BROWSE button on the faceplate to choose a
selection.
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361
362 MULTIMEDIA
Seek Functions
SEEK UP
Push and release the SEEK UP button on the
faceplate to tune the radio to the next listenable
station or channel.
During a SEEK UP function, if the radio reaches
the starting station after passing through the
entire band two times, the radio will stop at the
station where it began.
SEEK DOWN
Push and release the SEEK DOWN button on
the faceplate to tune the radio to the next
listenable station or channel.
During a SEEK DOWN function, if the radio
reaches the starting station after passing
through the entire band two times, the radio will
stop at the station where it began.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If
Equipped
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear digital sound, coast to coast. The
subscription service provider is SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio. This service offers over
130 channels of music, sports, news,
entertainment, and programming for children,
directly from its satellites and broadcasting
studios. A one-year SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
subscription is included.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc. and its
subsidiaries. SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
requires a subscription, sold separately after
the trial subscription included with vehicle
purchase. Prices and programming are
provided by SiriusXM® and are subject to
change. Subscriptions governed by Terms &
Conditions available at www.siriusxm.com/
customeragreement. SiriusXM® Radio US
service is only available to those at least 18
years of age in the 48 contiguous United States,
D.C., and PR. Service is available in Canada; see
www.siriusxm.ca.
Setting Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes,
and are activated by pushing any of the six
PRESET buttons on the faceplate
When you are receiving a station that you wish
to commit into memory, push and hold the
desired numbered button on the faceplate for
more than two seconds or until you hear a
confirmation beep.
The Radio stores up to 18 presets in each of the
Radio modes. Push the A-B-C button on the
faceplate to select the A, B or C preset list.
Audio
Push the MENU button on the Uconnect 3.0 and
find the AUDIO menu within it, to enter the Audio
Menu. Turning the TUNE/SCROLL knob
highlights the desired selection.
The Audio Menu shows the following options for
you to customize the audio settings:
Treble, Mid, Bass, Fade And Balance — Select
the desired setting to adjust, then push the
ENTER/BROWSE button. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL knob to adjust the setting + or – 9.
Push the BACK button on the faceplate when
done.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362
MULTIMEDIA 363
Speed Adjusted Volume (if equipped) —
Select Speed Adjusted Volume and push the
ENTER/BROWSE button. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL knob to adjust the setting to Off, 1,
2, or 3. Push the BACK button on the face-
plate when done.
Loudness (if equipped) — Select Loudness
and push the ENTER/BROWSE button to
mark the check box on or off. Push the BACK
button on the faceplate when done.
AUX Volume Offset (if equipped) — Select AUX
Volume Offset and push the ENTER/BROWSE
button. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
adjust the setting + or – 3. Push the BACK
button on the faceplate when done.
Clock Setting
1. Push the MENU button at the bottom of the
radio, and push the ENTER/BROWSE
button for System Settings. Next, select the
Time and Format setting and then select
Set Time by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE
button.
2. Adjust the hours or minutes by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL knob, then pushing the
ENTER/BROWSE button to move to the next
entry. You can also select 12 hr or 24 hr
format by turning the TUNE/SCROLL knob,
then pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button
on the desired selection.
3. Once the time is set, press the BACK button
to exit the time screen.
Media Mode
Operating Media Mode
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA
button on the faceplate located to the left of the
display. Once in Media Mode, press the MEDIA
button in order to select the desired media
source.
Audio Source Selection
Push the MEDIA button on the faceplate to
select the desired audio source, disc (if
equipped), AUX, USB or Bluetooth® audio
device.
Seek Up/Seek Down
Push and release the SEEK UP button on the
faceplate for the next selection.
Push and release the SEEK DOWN button on
the faceplate to return to the beginning of the
current selection, or return to the beginning of
the previous selection if the Media is within the
first three seconds of the current selection.
Fast SEEK UP
Push and hold the SEEK UP button on the
faceplate and the desired mode will begin to
fast forward through the current track until the
button on the faceplate is released.
Fast SEEK DOWN
Push and hold the SEEK DOWN button on
the faceplate and the desired mode will begin to
rewind through the current track until the
button on the faceplate is released.
Track Info
Push the INFO button on the faceplate to
display the current track information.
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363
364 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
Refer to “Operating Radio Mode” in “Radio
Mode” in this chapter for the adjustable audio
settings.
USB/iPod® Mode
USB/iPod® Mode is entered by either inserting
a USB Jump Drive or iPod® cable into the USB
port, or by pushing the MEDIA button on the
faceplate located to the left of the display. Once
in Media Mode, push the MEDIA button and
select USB/iPod®.
Inserting USB/iPod® Device
Gently insert the USB/iPod® device into the
USB port. If you insert a USB/iPod® device with
the ignition ON/RUN and the radio On, the unit
will switch to USB/iPod® mode and begin to
play when you insert the device. The display will
show the track number, and index time in
minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start
of track 1.
Bluetooth® Mode
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) or
Bluetooth® Mode is entered by pairing a
Bluetooth® device containing music to the
Uconnect system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must
be paired with the Uconnect Phone to
communicate with the Uconnect system.
Once the Bluetooth® device is paired to the
Uconnect system, push the MEDIA button
located on the faceplate. Once in Media Mode,
select Source screen and then select
Bluetooth®.
For mobile phone compatibility and pairing
instructions, please visit UconnectPhone.com.
AUX Mode
AUX Mode is entered by inserting an AUX device
using a cable with a 3.5 mm stereo audio jack
into the AUX port, or by pushing MEDIA button
on the faceplate located to the left of the
display. Once in Media Mode, push the MEDIA
button and select AUX.
Inserting Auxiliary Device
Gently insert the auxiliary device cable into the
AUX port. If you insert an auxiliary device with
the ignition ON/RUN and the radio On, the unit
will switch to AUX mode and begin to play when
you insert the device cable.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the auxiliary device (e.g.,
selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.)
cannot be provided by the radio; use the device
controls instead. Adjust the volume with the
ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob, or with the
volume of the attached device.
NOTE:
The vehicle radio unit is acting as the amplifier
for audio output from the auxiliary device.
Therefore, if the volume control on the auxiliary
device is set too low, there will be insufficient
audio signal for the radio unit to play the music
on the device.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 364
MULTIMEDIA 365
Phone Mode
Operating Phone Mode
Phone Mode Voice Commands
The Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system
with Voice Command Capability. Refer to “Voice
Recognition Quick Tips” for further information.
The Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone
number with your mobile phone using simple
voice commands.
NOTE:
The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Profile. To check mobile phone compatibility
please visit UconnectPhone.com.
Uconnect System Support:
US residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day, 7 days a
week)
Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or
call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
Monday–Friday: 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
Saturday: 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Sunday: Closed
Changing The Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pushing the PHONE
button on the faceplate, then adjust the
volume during a normal call.
2. Use the radio ON/VOLUME rotary knob to
adjust the volume to a comfortable level
while the Uconnect system is speaking.
Please note the volume setting for
Uconnect phone is different than the audio
system volume setting.
Making A Phone Call
1. Push the PHONE button on the steering
wheel.
2. After the BEEP, say “dial” or “call” a full
name or phone number.
NOTE:
A phone call can also be made with the
Uconnect 3.0 by pushing the phone button on
the radio, and selecting a particular contact in
the phone book, or recent calls.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 365
366 MULTIMEDIA
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During Call
Push the “Play/Pause/Mute” hard button on
the radio or during a call, push the Voice
Recognition button on the steering wheel. After
the BEEP, say “mute” (or “mute off”).
Pairing A Phone
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must
pair your compatible Bluetooth® enabled
mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the
process of establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the Uconnect
system.
To complete the pairing process, you will need
to reference your mobile phone Owner's
Manual. Please visit UconnectPhone.com for
complete mobile phone compatibility
information.
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK.
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
2. Push the Phone button on the faceplate.
NOTE:
If there is no phones currently connected with
the system, a pop-up will appear asking if you
would like to pair a mobile phone.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select Bluetooth® and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for Bluetooth®
connections.
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Settings
button from the Uconnect Phone main
screen.
Select Paired Phones, and then select
Add Device.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select Uconnect and accept the connec-
tion request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in progress
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select Uconnect.
8. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect Phone.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones will require you to enter
the PIN.
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect
system automatically when entering the
vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
Bluetooth® audio device can be connected
to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is
selected, simply select Uconnect from the
mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth®
screen, and the Uconnect system
reconnects to the Bluetooth® device.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 366
MULTIMEDIA 367
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the
Uconnect system may interfere with the Blue-
tooth® connection. If this happens, simply
repeat the pairing process. However, first, make
sure to delete the device from the list of phones
on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to
remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth® settings.
Phonebook Download — Phonebook Transfer
From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your
phone, Uconnect Phone will ask you if you want
to download names (text names) and number
entries from your mobile phone’s phonebook.
Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook
Access Profile may support this feature. See
UconnectPhone.com for supported phones.
Receiving A Call — Accept (And End)
1. When an incoming call rings or is
announced on Uconnect, push the PHONE
button on the faceplate.
2. To end a call, push the PHONE button on the
steering wheel or the PHONE button on the
faceplate.
NOTE:
A phone call can also be accepted, and ended
by pushing the steering wheel PHONE button.
Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset And
Vehicle
With a call in progress use the browse/enter
scroll wheel to select transfer then press the
enter button or push the “Phone Pickup” button
on the steering wheel controls during a call,
push the Voice Recognition button on the
steering wheel. After the BEEP, say “transfer
call.”
UCONNECT 3 WITH 5-INCH DISPLAY
Introduction
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 — RADIO
Push the RADIO button on the faceplate to
enter Radio Mode. The different tuner modes;
FM/AM/SXM (if equipped), can be selected by
pressing the corresponding buttons on the
touchscreen in Radio Mode.
2 — COMPASS
Push the COMPASS button on the faceplate to
display the current direction of the vehicle.
3 — SETTINGS
Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate to
display the customer programmable features.
4 — MORE
Push the MORE button on the faceplate to
access additional options.
5 — ENTER/BROWSE & TUNE/SCROLL
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button to accept a
highlighted selection on the screen. Rotate the
TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll through a
list or tune to a radio station.
6 — SCREEN OFF
Push the SCREEN OFF button to turn the
touchscreen off. To turn the touchscreen back
on, press the screen.
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367
368 MULTIMEDIA
7 — MUTE
Push the MUTE button to turn off the audio of
the radio system. Press it again to turn the
audio back on.
8 — VOLUME/POWER
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume.
Push the VOLUME/POWER button to turn the
system on or off.
9 — PHONE
Push the PHONE button on the faceplate to
access the Uconnect Phone feature.
10 — MEDIA
Pushing the MEDIA button on the faceplate will
allow you to switch to Media mode: CD (if
equipped), USB, AUX, and Bluetooth®.
Radio Mode
Operating Radio Mode
Radio Mode
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
FM
AM
SiriusXM® Radio – If Equipped
Push the RADIO button on the faceplate, to
enter the Radio Mode. The different tuner
modes – FM/AM/SXM (if equipped) – can then
be selected by pressing the corresponding
buttons on the touchscreen in the Radio mode.
VOLUME/POWER Knob
Rotate the VOLUME/POWER rotary knob to
adjust the volume. When the audio system is
turned on, the sound will be set at the same
volume level as last played.
Push the VOLUME/POWER button to turn the
system on or off.
MUTE Button
Push the MUTE button to mute the system.
Push the MUTE button again to unmute the
system.
1 — Station Presets
2 — All Presets
3 — Seek Up
4 — Audio
5 — Info
6 — Tune
7 — AM/FM/SXM
8 — Seek Down
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 368
MULTIMEDIA 369
TUNE/SCROLL Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
ENTER/BROWSE button to choose a selection.
Seek Functions
Seek Up
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen to tune the radio to the next
listenable station or channel.
During a Seek Up function, if the radio reaches
the starting station after passing through the
entire band two times, the radio will stop at the
station where it began.
Fast Seek Up
Press and hold the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen to advance the radio through the
available stations or channels at a faster rate.
The radio stops at the next available station or
channel when the button on the touchscreen is
released.
Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to tune the radio to the next
listenable station or channel.
During a Seek Down function, if the radio
reaches the starting station after passing
through the entire band two times, the radio will
stop at the station where it began.
Fast Seek Down
Press and hold the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to advance the radio through the
available stations or channels at a faster rate.
The radio stops at the next available station or
channel when the button on the touchscreen is
released.
Direct Tune Functions
Press the Tune button on the touchscreen to
directly tune to a specific radio station. A
keypad will appear. On the keypad, enter in your
desired radio station, and the system will
automatically tune to it.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If
Equipped
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast to coast radio content.
SiriusXM® is a subscription based service.
Get over 160 channels on your satellite radio,
and enjoy all you want, all in one place. Hear
commercial-free music, sports, news, talk, and
entertainment. Get all the premium
programming, including Howard Stern, every
NFL® game, every MLB®, every NHL® game,
every NASCAR® race, Martha Stewart, Oprah
Radio, and more. Get 20+ extra channels,
including SiriusXM® Latino, offering 20
channels of commercial-free music, news, talk,
comedy, sports, and more dedicated to Spanish
language programming.
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 369
370 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the trial included with the new
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your
service at the end of your trial subscription, the
plan you choose will automatically renew and
bill at then-current rates until you call
SiriusXM® at 1-866-635-2349 to cancel. See
SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for complete
terms at www.siriusxm.com (US Residents) or
www.siriusxm.ca (Canadian Residents). All fees
and programming subject to change. Our
satellite service is available only to those at
least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA
and D.C. Our Sirius satellite service is also
available in Puerto Rico (with coverage
limitations). Our Internet radio service is
available throughout our satellite service area
and in Alaska and Hawaii. © 2019 SiriusXM®
Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios
equipped with a Satellite receiver. To receive
satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be outside
with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen displays Acquiring Signal, you may
need to change the vehicle’s position to receive
a signal. In most cases, the satellite radio does
not receive a signal in underground parking
garages or tunnels.
Setting Presets
Presets are available for all radio modes and
are activated by pressing any of the four preset
buttons on the touchscreen, located at the top
of the screen.
When you are receiving a station that you wish
to commit into memory, press and hold the
desired numbered button on the touchscreen
for more than two seconds or until you hear a
confirmation beep.
The radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
radio modes. Four presets are visible at the top
of the radio screen.
Audio Settings
1. Push the SETTINGS button on the right side
of the radio faceplate. If the settings button
is not present, push the MORE button on
the faceplate, then the Settings button on
the touchscreen.
2. Scroll down and press the Audio button on
the touchscreen to open the Audio Menu.
3. The Audio Menu shows the following
options for you to customize your audio
settings:
Auto Play — Press the Auto Play button on
the touchscreen to select between ON or
OFF. This feature determines if music
automatically starts playing from a device
when it is first connected to the Media
hub’s USB port.
Equalizer — Press the Equalizer button on
the touchscreen to adjust the Bass, Mid
and Treble. Use the + or – buttons on the
touchscreen to adjust the equalizer to
your desired settings. Press the Back
Arrow button on the touchscreen when
done.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 370
MULTIMEDIA 371
Balance/Fade — Press the Balance/Fade
button on the touchscreen to adjust the
sound from the speakers. Use the arrow
button on the touchscreen to adjust the
sound level from the front and rear or
right and left side speakers. Press the
Center C button on the touchscreen to
reset the balance and fade to the factory
setting. Press the Back Arrow button on
the touchscreen when done.
Speed Adjust Volume — Press the Speed
Adjusted Volume button on the touch-
screen to select between OFF, 1, 2 or 3.
This will decrease the radio volume rela-
tive to a decrease in vehicle speed. Press
the Back Arrow button on the touch-
screen when done.
Loudness — Press the Loudness button
on the touchscreen to select the Loud-
ness feature. When this feature is acti-
vated, it improves sound quality at lower
volumes.
Clock Settings
1. Push the SETTINGS button on the
faceplate, or push the MORE button on the
faceplate, and then the settings button on
the touchscreen.
2. Select the Clock and Date button on the
touchscreen.
3. Next, select “Set Time” to change the time.
4. Select “Set Date” to change the date.
5. To set the time, select the Seek Up or Seek
Down arrows as appropriate. Select “12 hrs
or 24 hrs”, “AM” or “PM” or select the “Time
Zones” (if equipped).
6. Select the Done button when complete.
Media Mode
Operating Media Mode
Media Mode
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA
button located on the faceplate.
1 — Seek Down
2 — Seek Up
3 — Additional Functions
4 — Info
5 — Pause/Play
6 — Source
7 — Browse
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 371
372 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source button
on the touchscreen and the desired mode
button on the touchscreen. Disc (if equipped),
USB, SD Card (if equipped), AUX and
Bluetooth® (if equipped) are the Media sources
available. When available, you can select the
Browse button on the touchscreen to be given
these options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or Info
button on the touchscreen for artist information
on the current song playing.
Seek Up/Seek Down Functions
Seek Up /Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection. Press and
release the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to return to the beginning of the
current selection, or return to the beginning of
the previous selection if the track is within the
first few seconds of the current selection.
Fast Seek Up
Press and hold the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen and the desired mode will begin to
fast forward through the current track until the
button on the touchscreen is released.
Fast Seek Down
Press and hold the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen and the desired mode will begin to
rewind through the current track until the
button on the touchscreen is released.
Track Selection (Browse)
Rotate the Browse button on the touchscreen to
scroll through and select a desired track on the
iPod®, MP3 player, phone, or USB. Press the
Exit button on the touchscreen if you wish to
cancel the Browse function.
Repeat
Press the Repeat button on the touchscreen to
repeat the song selection. To cancel Repeat,
press the Repeat button on the touchscreen a
second time.
Shuffle
Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen to
play the selections on the USB/iPod® or
Bluetooth® device in random order to provide
an interesting change of pace. Press the Shuffle
button on the touchscreen a second time to
turn this feature off.
Track Info
Press the Info button on the touchscreen to
display the current track information. Press the
X button on the touchscreen to cancel this
feature.
Audio
Refer to “Audio Settings” for the adjustable
audio settings.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 372
MULTIMEDIA 373
USB/iPod® Mode
USB/iPod® Mode is entered by either inserting
a USB jump drive or iPod® cable into the USB
port, or by pushing the MEDIA button located on
the faceplate. Once in Media Mode, press the
Source button on the touchscreen, and select
the USB/iPod® button.
Inserting USB/iPod® Device
Gently insert the USB/iPod® device into the
USB Port. If you insert a USB/iPod® device with
the ignition ON, the unit will switch to USB/
iPod® mode and begin to play. The display will
show the track number and index time in
minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start
of track 1.
Browse
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
select an Artist, Albums, Genres, Songs,
Playlists or Folders from the USB/iPod® device.
Once the desired selection is made you can
chose from the available media by pressing the
button on the touchscreen. Press the Exit
button on the touchscreen if you wish to cancel
the Browse function.
Bluetooth® Mode
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) or
Bluetooth® Mode is entered by pairing a
Bluetooth® device containing music to the
Uconnect system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must
be paired with the Uconnect Phone to
communicate with the Uconnect system.
Refer to “Pairing a Phone” in the Phone Mode
section for the pairing procedure.
Once the Bluetooth® device is paired to the
Uconnect system, push the MEDIA button
located on the faceplate. Once in Media Mode,
press the Source button on the touchscreen
and select the Bluetooth® button.
NOTE:
For mobile phone compatibility and pairing
instructions, please visit UconnectPhone.com.
AUX Mode
AUX Mode is entered by inserting a AUX device
using a stereo cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack
into the AUX port or by pushing the MEDIA
button located on the faceplate. Once in Media
Mode, press the Source button on the
touchscreen, and select the AUX button.
Inserting Auxiliary Device
Gently insert the Auxiliary device cable into the
AUX Port. If you insert an Auxiliary device with
the ignition on, the unit will switch to AUX mode
and begin to play.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g.,
selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.)
cannot be provided by the radio; use the device
controls instead. Adjust the volume with the
VOLUME rotary knob or with the volume of the
attached device.
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if
the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set
too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for
the radio unit to play the music on the device.
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 373
374 MULTIMEDIA
Phone Mode
Operating Phone Mode
Phone Mode
The Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system
with voice command capability. Refer to Voice
Recognition (VR) section for further information.
The Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone
number with your mobile phone using simple
voice commands.
NOTE:
The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Profile. To check mobile phone compatibility,
please visit UconnectPhone.com.
For Uconnect customer support:
US residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or
call 1-877-855-8400
Canadian residents - visit Uconnect-
Phone.com or call 1-800-465-2001 (English)
or 1-800-387-9983 (French)
Phone Mode Activation
Press the PHONE button on the faceplate to
activate the Phone mode.
Main Functions
The buttons on the display can be used to:
Compose phone numbers using the graphic
keypad on the display.
Display and call the contacts in the mobile
phone phonebook.
Display and call contacts from the Recent
Calls menu.
Pair up to 10 phones/audio devices to make
access and connection easier and quicker.
Transfer calls from the system to the mobile
phone and vice versa.
Deactivate the microphone audio for privacy.
The mobile phone audio is transmitted through
the vehicle’s audio system. The system
automatically mutes the radio when the Phone
function is used.
1 — Call/Redial/Hold
2 — Phone Signal Strength
3 — Paired Phone
4 — Phone Battery Life
5 — Mute Microphone
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
7 — Uconnect Phone Settings
8 — Text Messaging
9 — Direct Dial Pad
10 — Recent Call Log
11 — Browse Phone Book
12 — End Call
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 374
MULTIMEDIA 375
Connecting/Disconnecting A Mobile Phone
Or Bluetooth® Device
Pairing A Phone
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must
pair your compatible Bluetooth®-enabled
mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the
process of establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the Uconnect
system.
To complete the pairing process, you need to
reference your mobile phone Owner's Manual.
Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete
mobile phone compatibility information.
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK.
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
2. Push the PHONE button on the faceplate.
If there are no phones currently
connected with the system, a pop-up
appears asking if you would like to pair a
mobile phone.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for Bluetooth®
connections.
Pairing A Phone
If “No” is selected and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Settings but-
ton from the Uconnect Phone main screen.
Select the Paired Phones button, and
then press the Add Device button on the
touchscreen.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select “Uconnect” and accept the
connection request.
5. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress
screen while the system is connecting.
6. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect.”
7. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect Phone.
Some mobile phones will require you to
enter the PIN.
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 375
376 MULTIMEDIA
8. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting the Yes button will make
this phone the highest priority. This phone
will take precedence over other paired
phones within range and will connect to the
Uconnect system automatically when
entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone
and/or one Bluetooth® audio device can be
connected to the Uconnect system at a
time. If the No button is selected, simply
select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/
audio device Bluetooth® screen, and the
Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the
Uconnect system may interfere with the Blue-
tooth® connection. If this happens, simply
repeat the pairing process. However, first, make
sure to delete the device from the list of phones
on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to
remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth® settings.
Storing Names/Numbers in The Mobile Phone
Before pairing your mobile phone, you must
make sure you have stored the names you want
to contact in the phonebook on your mobile
phone, so you can call them using the vehicle's
hands-free system.
If your phonebook does not contain any names,
enter new names for the most frequently used
numbers.
For further details, consult your mobile phone
owner's handbook.
NOTE:
The names in the phonebook which do not
contain phone numbers or where both fields
(name and surname) are empty will not be
displayed.
Connection
The system connects automatically to the
paired mobile phone with the highest priority.
To choose a specific mobile phone or
Bluetooth® audio device, proceed as follows:
1. Access the Settings menu.
2. Select the Phone/Bluetooth® button.
3. Select the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
list using the corresponding button on the
display.
4. Select the specific device (mobile phone or
Bluetooth® device).
5. Press the Connect button.
6. During the connection stage, a screen is
displayed showing the progress of the
operation.
7. The device connected is highlighted in the
list.
Disconnection
To disconnect a specific mobile phone or
Bluetooth® audio device, proceed as follows:
1. Access the Settings menu.
2. Select the Phone/Bluetooth® button.
3. Select the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
list using the corresponding button on the
display.
4. Select the specific device (mobile phone or
Bluetooth® device).
5. Press the Disconnect button.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 376
MULTIMEDIA 377
Deletion Of A Mobile Phone Or A Bluetooth®
Audio Device
To delete a mobile phone or Bluetooth® audio
device from a list, proceed as follows:
1. Access the Settings menu.
2. Select the Phone/Bluetooth® button.
3. Select the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
list using the corresponding button on the
display.
4. Select the device (mobile phone or
Bluetooth® device).
5. Press the Delete Device button.
6. A confirmation screen will appear on the
display:
Press the Yes button to delete the device.
Press the No button to cancel the
operation.
Setting A Mobile Phone Or A Bluetooth®
Audio Device As A Favorite
To set a mobile phone or Bluetooth® audio
device as a favorite, proceed as follows:
1. Access the Settings menu.
2. Select the Phone/Bluetooth® button.
3. Select the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
list using the corresponding button on the
display.
4. Select the specific device (mobile phone or
Bluetooth® device).
5. Press the Make Favorite button.
6. The device selected is moved to the top of
the list.
Downloading A Phonebook From Your Mobile
Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your
phone, Uconnect Phone asks you if you want to
download names (text names) and number
entries from your mobile phone’s phonebook.
Specific Bluetooth®-enabled phones with
Phonebook Access Profile may support this
feature. See UconnectPhone.com for supported
phones.
If equipped and specifically supported by your
phone, Uconnect Phone asks you if you want to
download names (text names) and number
entries from your mobile phone’s phonebook.
Specific Bluetooth®-enabled phones with
Phonebook Access Profile may support this
feature.
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 377
378 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
If supported, the download and update
begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless
phone connection is made to the Uconnect
Phone. For example, after you start the
vehicle. You may be asked for permission to
initiate the phonebook download.
A maximum of 2,000 contact names with six
numbers per contact will be downloaded and
updated every time a phone is connected to
the Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of
entries downloaded, there may be a short
delay before the latest downloaded names
can be used. Until then, if available, the
previously downloaded phonebook is
available for use.
Only the phonebook of the currently
connected mobile phone is accessible.
Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is down-
loaded. SIM card phonebook is not part of
the mobile phonebook.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be
edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone.
These can only be edited on the mobile
phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
Deletion Of Phone Data (Phonebook And
Recent Calls)
Select "Delete Phone Data" on the display to
delete the list of recent calls and the phonebook
copy.
Making A Phone Call
Dialing The Phone Number Using The
"Keyboard" Icon On The Display
Enter the phone number using the graphic
keypad displayed.
Proceed as follows:
1. Press the Keyboard icon on the display and
use the number buttons to enter the
number.
2. Press the Call button to make a call.
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name Or Phone
Number
1. Push the PHONE button on the steering
wheel.
2. After the beep, say “dial” (or “call” a full
name or phone number).
Recent Calls
The list of the last calls made for each of the
following call types can be displayed:
Calls received
Calls made
Calls without a reply
All calls
To access these types of calls, press the Recent
Calls button on the Phone menu main screen.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 378
MULTIMEDIA 379
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
When a phone conversation is active, a second
phone call can be made as follows:
Select the number/contact from the list of
recent calls.
Select the contact from the phonebook.
Press the Hold button and dial the number
using the graphic keyboard of the display.
Redial
To call the number/contact of last call made,
press the Redial button.
Answering An Incoming Call
Call Controls
The buttons on the display allow the following
phone call functions to be managed:
Answer
End
Ignore
Put on hold/resume
Deactivate/activate the microphone
Transfer the call
Switch from one call to the other
Conference/merge two active calls
Answering Or Ignoring A Call With No Call
Currently In Progress
When an incoming call rings or is announced on
the Uconnect system, push the Answer button
on the touchscreen, or push the PHONE button
on the steering wheel.
Answering Or Ignoring An Incoming Call With A
Call Currently In Progress
When an incoming call rings or is announced on
the Uconnect system, push the Answer button
on the touchscreen, or push the PHONE button
on the steering wheel to answer the call and put
the ongoing call on hold.
NOTE:
Not all mobile phones support the management
of an incoming call when another phone conver-
sation is active.
Managing Two Phone Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), it is possible to switch between them
by pressing the Call On Hold button or to merge
the two calls into a conference call by pressing
the Merge Calls button.
NOTE:
Check whether the mobile phone in use
supports the management of a second call and
the "Conference" mode.
Transferring/Call Continuation
Transferring
The ongoing calls can be transferred from the
mobile phone to the system and vice versa
without ending the call.
To transfer the call, press the Transfer button.
Call Continuation
After the engine is switched off, it is still possible
to continue a phone call.
The call continues until it is ended manually or
for a maximum period of about 20 minutes.
When the system is switched off, the call is
transferred to the mobile phone.
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 379
380 MULTIMEDIA
Ending A Call
Press the End button on the touchscreen or the
PHONE button on the steering wheel controls to
end a call in progress.
Only the ongoing call is ended and any call on
hold becomes the new active call.
Depending on the type of mobile phone, if the
ongoing call is ended by the caller, the call on
hold may not be activated automatically.
Uconnect Phone Features
Mute/Unmute
1. During a call, push the VOICE COMMAND
button on the steering wheel.
2. After the beep, say “mute” or “mute off”.
Reading Messages
The system can read the messages received by
the mobile phone.
To use this function, the mobile phone must
support the SMS exchange function via
Bluetooth®.
If this function is not supported by the phone,
the corresponding message button is
deactivated (grayed out) or may only accept
incoming messages.
When a text message is received, the display
will show a screen where the option "Listen",
"Call" or "Ignore" can be selected.
Press the Message button to access the list of
SMS messages received by the mobile phone.
The list displays a maximum of 60 messages
received.
Browsing SMS
Using the steering wheel commands, you can
view and manage the last 10 SMS messages
received on the instrument panel. To use this
function, the mobile phone must support the
SMS exchange function through Bluetooth®.
Select the PHONE button on the instrument
panel menu, and then select “SMS Reader”
using the arrow keys on the steering wheel
controls.
The “SMS Reader” submenu allows the last
10 SMS messages to be displayed.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located
on the back surface of the steering wheel.
Reach behind the wheel to access the switches.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
(Rearview Of Steering Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker type switch
with a push-button in the center. Pushing the
top of the switch will increase the volume, and
pushing the bottom of the switch will decrease
the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media etc.)
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 380
MULTIMEDIA 381
The left-hand control is a rocker type switch with
a push-button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on
which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will SEEK up for
the next listenable station and pushing the
bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next
listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that
you have programmed in the radio preset
button.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the
next track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
Bluetooth®). Pushing the bottom of the switch
once goes to the beginning of the current track,
or to the beginning of the previous track if it is
within eight seconds after the current track
begins to play.
IPOD®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Located inside the center console upper lid, this
feature allows an iPod® or external USB device
to be plugged into the USB port.
iPod® control supports the following: iPod®/
iPod® classic, iPod® mini, iPod® nano, iPod®
shuffle, iPod® touch, and iPhone® devices.
Some iPod® software versions may not fully
support the iPod® control features. Please visit
Apple’s® website for software updates.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB Port
may activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped.
Center Console USB/AUX Media Hub
Refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement, the applicable radio section in this
manual, or visit UconnectPhone.com for further
information.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone
being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or
noisy performance from your radio. This
condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile phone antenna. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your
radio performance does not satisfactorily
“clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is
recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation
when not using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal
wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio
frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 20 cm or further from the
human body.
1 — USB Port #1
2 — Aux Jack
3 — USB Port #2
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 381
382 MULTIMEDIA
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Develop Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 382
MULTIMEDIA 383
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reason-
able protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guar-
antee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful inter-
ference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one
or more of the following measures:
a. Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
b. Consult an authorized dealer or an expe-
rienced radio technician for help.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR)
with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to
control your Uconnect system.
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in
the Apps menus, of your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you have a
Uconnect 4C system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system
with your voice are the buttons on your steering
wheel.
1. Visit
UconnectPhone.com
to check mobile
device and feature compatibility and to
find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead. The
microphone is located in the headliner and
aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you
must first push either the VR or Phone
button, wait until after the beep, then say
your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone
button and saying a Voice Command from
current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions
2 — Push To Initiate, Answer, End A Phone Call, Or
Send/Receive A Text
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 383
384 MULTIMEDIA
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
voice recognition system’s status. Cues appear
on the top of the touchscreen.
Uconnect 3.0
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Radio Visual Cues
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say:
“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
TIP:
At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR
button on the steering wheel and say “Help.”
The system provides you with a list of
commands.
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB,
Bluetooth®, and auxiliary ports (if equipped).
Voice operation is only available for connected
USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD player
optional and not available on all vehicles.)
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 384
MULTIMEDIA 385
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say one of the following commands
and follow the prompts to switch your media
source or choose an artist.
“Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to AUX”
“Change source to USB”
“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album
Greatest Hits”; “Play song Moonlight
Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
TIP:
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
see all of the music on your USB device. Your
Voice Command must match exactly how the
artist, album, song, and genre information is
displayed.
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls
is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook
button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your
system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for
mobile phone compatibility and pairing
instructions.
Push the Phone button . After the beep, say
one of the following commands:
“Call John Smith”
“Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system
prompts”
“Redial (call previous outgoing phone
number)”
“Call back (call previous incoming phone
number)”
TIP:
When providing a Voice Command, push the
Phone button and say “Call,” then
pronounce the name exactly as it appears in
your phone book. When a contact has multiple
phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith
work.”
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect announces incoming text messages.
Push the Phone button and say “Listen.”
(Must have compatible mobile phone paired to
Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to
you, push the Phone button
. After the
beep, say: “Reply
.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the pre-defined
messages and follow the system prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be
<number>
minutes late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my
way.
Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 385
386 MULTIMEDIA
TIP:
Your mobile phone must have the full imple-
mentation of the Message Access Profile (MAP)
to take advantage of this feature. For details
about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. For further
information on how to enable this feature on
your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone’s®
User Manual.
TIP:
Voice Text Reply is not compatible with
iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with
Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send
a text message.
Climate (4C/4C NAV)
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and
keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with
climate control.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say one of the following commands:
“Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
TIP:
Voice Command for Climate may only be used
to adjust the interior temperature of your
vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust
the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped.
Navigation (4C NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save
time and become more productive when you do
not know exactly how to get to where you want
to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
on the steering wheel. After the beep, say:
“
Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn
Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP:
To start a POI search, push the VR button on the
steering wheel. After the beep, say: “Find
nearest coffee shop.”
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text
messages, select media, place phone calls, and
much more. Siri uses your natural language to
understand what you mean and responds back
to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and
your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you
perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep
you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages, and many other
useful requests.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 386
MULTIMEDIA 387
Using Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable
notifications from incoming calls and texts,
allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while you were
using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call or both, when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly.”
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Only the beginning of your custom message
will be seen on the touchscreen.
Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth® MAP.
Android Auto™ — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Auto™ features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to
interact with Android’s™ best-in-class speech
technology through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your Android™-powered
smartphone and a number of its apps onto your
Uconnect touchscreen.
Connect your Android™ 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher
to one of the media USB ports, using the
factory-provided USB cable, and press the new
Android Auto™ icon that replaces your “Phone”
icon on the main menu bar to begin Android
Auto™. Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel, or press and hold the
Microphone icon within Android Auto™, to
activate Android’s™ VR, which recognizes
natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
Maps
Music
Phone
Text Messages
Additional Apps
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher and download
app on Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™,
and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for further information.
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 387
388 MULTIMEDIA
Apple CarPlay® — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay® features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone
to project your iPhone® and many apps onto
your Uconnect touchscreen (smartphone’s data
plan will be used for certain apps). Connect your
iPhone® 5 or higher to one of the media USB
ports, using the Apple® factory-provided
Lightning cable, and press the new Apple
CarPlay® icon that replaces your Phone icon on
the main menu bar to begin Apple CarPlay®.
Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel, or press and hold the Home button
within Apple CarPlay®, to activate Siri, which
recognizes natural voice commands to use
certain iPhone’s® features such as:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps
Additional Apps
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone®. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply.
Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple®.
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple®
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for further information.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 388
MULTIMEDIA 389
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Additional Information
© 2019 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC.
Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM®
and all related marks and logos are trademarks of
SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or
call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days
a week)
Canadian residents visit www.DriveUcon-
nect.ca or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
9
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 389
390
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to
have the right papers with you. Take your
warranty folder. All work to be performed may
not be covered by the warranty. Discuss
additional charges with the service manager.
Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history. This can often provide a clue to
the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or
the specific work you want done. If you've had
an accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the
items in order of priority. At many authorized
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when
you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers
are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We
want you to be happy with our products and
services.
Warranty service must be done by an
authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that
you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.
They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer's authorized dealers
have the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
special tools, and the latest information to
ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer service manager first. Most
matters can be resolved with this process.
If for some reason you are still not satisfied,
talk to the general manager or owner of the
authorized dealer. They want to know if you
need assistance.
If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve
the concern, you may contact the manufac-
turer's customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's
customer center should include the following
information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile,
and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 390
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 391
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726-4636
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
387-9983 French
Mexico
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (866) 726-4636
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing
difficulties, the manufacturer has installed
special Telecommunication Devices for the
Deaf (TDD) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional
teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can
communicate with the manufacturer by dialing
1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's
New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The
Mopar Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY
vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s
warranty. If you purchased a Mopar Vehicle
Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service
contract, call the manufacturer's Service
Contract National Customer Hotline at
1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents,
call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the
FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those
documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased
with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty
issues or related concerns.
10
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 391
392 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories
are available from an authorized dealer. They
are recommended for your vehicle in order to
help keep the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go
to
http://www.safercar.gov
; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov
.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 392
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 393
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use
either the website or the phone numbers listed
below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide
the information that students and professional
technicians need in diagnosing/
troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining,
servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations.
These practical manuals make it easy for
students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle
systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using
step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a
complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared
with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating,
emergency and maintenance procedures as
well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.
Call toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
To order a hard copy of your Owner’s
Information, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US)
10
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 393
394
INDEX
A
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............292
Adding Fuel ....................................................215
Additives, Fuel ...............................................324
Adjust
Down
.................................................... 28 , 30
Forward ................................................ 28 , 29
Rearward.............................................. 28 , 29
Up......................................................... 28 , 30
Adjustable Pedals ............................................35
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation ......................................156
Air Bag Warning Light ................................153
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 160, 270
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................270
If Deployment Occurs ................................159
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................156
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............161
Maintenance .............................................161
Transporting Pets ......................................181
Air Bag Light ............................... 118 , 153, 183
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner
Filter)
.............................................................281
Air Conditioner Maintenance .........................283
Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................. 283 , 284
Air Conditioner System ................................. 283
Air Conditioning Filter ..............................67 , 284
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................66
Air Filter ........................................................ 281
Air Pressure
Tires ......................................................... 307
Alarm
Panic ...........................................................14
Security Alarm ....................................20 , 119
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle.........................................................10
Android Auto ................................................. 387
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 292 , 327
Disposal ................................................... 293
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 129
Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 123
Apple CarPlay ................................................ 388
Ashtray.............................................................85
Assist, Hill Start ............................................. 136
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 331
Auto Down Power Windows .............................68
Automatic Door Locks ......................................25
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .............66
Automatic Transmission .......................191 , 297
Adding Fluid .............................................. 297
Fluid And Filter Change ............................. 297
Fluid Change ............................................. 297
Fluid Level Check ...................................... 296
Fluid Type ........................................296 , 330
Special Additives ...................................... 296
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ... 194
Aux Cord........................................................ 381
Auxiliary Switches ............................................86
Axle Fluid..............................................297 , 330
Axle Lubrication ............................................ 297
B
Battery
.................................................120 , 278
Charging System Light .............................. 120
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................14
Belts, Seat .................................................... 182
Body Builders Guide ...........................................9
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................ 287
B-Pillar Location ............................................ 303
Brake Assist System ..................................... 130
Brake Control System ................................... 130
Brake Fluid ...........................................295 , 330
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 394
395
Brake System
...................................... 295 , 322
Fluid Check ...............................................295
Master Cylinder .........................................295
Parking ......................................................189
Warning Light ............................................118
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......................191
Bulb Replacement .........................................248
Bulbs, Light .......................................... 184 , 248
C
Camera
..........................................................213
Camera, Rear ................................................213
Camper ............................................................ 94
Capacities, Fluid ............................................327
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ...................................... 276 , 280
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................293
Car Washes ...................................................317
Carbon Monoxide Warning .................. 182 , 326
Cargo Light ...................................................... 45
Cellular Phone ...............................................381
Center High Mounted Stop Light ...................251
Center Seat Storage Compartment ................. 79
Chart, Tire Sizing ............................................299
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light) .............................................................128
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..................181
Checks, Safety ...............................................181
Child Restraint ...............................................162
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ........................................... 166
Child Seat Installation ..................... 174 , 176
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 173
Infant And Child Restraints ....................... 164
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 171
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 167
Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 165
Seating Positions ...................................... 167
Cigar Lighter ....................................................85
Clean Air Gasoline ......................................... 324
Cleaning
Wheels
..................................................... 313
Climate Control ................................................50
Manual ........................................................50
Cold Weather Operation ............................... 188
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 311
Contract, Service .......................................... 391
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 293
Cooling System ............................................. 291
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 292
Coolant Level ................................... 291 , 294
Cooling Capacity ....................................... 327
Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 293
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 291
Inspection................................................. 294
Points To Remember ................................ 294
Pressure Cap ............................................ 293
Radiator Cap ............................................ 293
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze) .........................292 , 327, 328
Corrosion Protection ..................................... 316
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ...................... 201
Cruise Light .......................................... 125 , 126
Customer Assistance .................................... 390
Cybersecurity ................................................ 331
D
Daytime Running Lights ...................................42
Dealer Service ............................................... 279
Defroster, Rear Window ...................................50
Defroster, Windshield ................................... 183
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ..............................48
Diagnostic System, Onboard ......................... 127
Differential, Limited Slip ................................ 200
Disable Vehicle Towing ................................. 268
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...................... 293
Disturb .......................................................... 387
Door Ajar ....................................................... 121
Door Ajar Light .............................................. 121
Door Locks
Automatic
....................................................25
Doors ...............................................................21
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ......................................26
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water
.................................... 233
11
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 395
396
E
Electric Brake Control System
.......................130
Anti-Lock Brake System .............................129
Electronic Roll Mitigation ................. 131 , 138
Electrical Power Outlets ................................... 83
Electronic Range Select (ERS) .......................195
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...................131
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ......120
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case ..............196
Emergency Braking ........................................189
Emergency, In Case Of
Jump Starting ............................................262
Emission Control System Maintenance .........128
Engine ...........................................................276
Air Cleaner.................................................281
Block Heater .............................................188
Break-In Recommendations ......................188
Compartment .................................. 276 , 277
Compartment Identification ............ 276 , 277
Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................................328
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................... 182 , 326
Fails To Start .............................................187
Flooded, Starting .......................................187
Fuel Requirements .......................... 323 , 327
Jump Starting ............................................262
Oil........................................... 279 , 327, 328
Oil Filler Cap .................................... 276 , 280
Oil Filter .....................................................281
Oil Reset ....................................................108
Oil Selection .................................... 280 , 327
Oil Synthetic ............................................. 281
Overheating .............................................. 265
Engine Oil Viscosity ....................................... 280
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ............................. 280
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature ................................................ 160 , 270
Entry System, Illuminated ................................47
Ethanol ......................................................... 325
Exhaust Gas Cautions .......................... 182 , 326
Exhaust System ................................... 182 , 289
Exterior Lights .........................................41 , 184
F
Filters
Air Cleaner
................................................ 281
Air Conditioning ..................................67 , 284
Engine Oil ........................................ 281 , 328
Engine Oil Disposal ................................... 281
Flashers
Hazard Warning ........................................ 236
Turn Signals ............................. 44 , 125, 184
Flash-To-Pass ...................................................43
Flat Tire Stowage .......................................... 259
Fluid Capacities ............................................ 327
Fluid Leaks ................................................... 184
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ........................................................ 295
Fluid, Brake .................................................. 330
Fluids And Lubricants .................................... 328
Fog Lights .............................................. 44 , 250
Fold Flat Load Floor .........................................81
Fold-Flat Seats .................................................26
Four Wheel Drive ........................................... 196
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................................. 267
Front Axle (Differential) ................................. 297
Fuel ............................................................... 323
Adding ...................................................... 215
Additives ................................................... 324
Clean Air ................................................... 324
Ethanol ..................................................... 325
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................................. 216
Gasoline ................................................... 323
Light.......................................................... 123
Materials Added ....................................... 324
Methanol .................................................. 325
Octane Rating .........................323 , 324, 328
Requirements .................................. 323 , 327
Tank Capacity ........................................... 327
Fuses ............................................................ 241
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)
.....................73
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ............................... 216
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................ 324
Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 324
Glass Cleaning .............................................. 321
Grocery Bag Retainer .......................................32
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 396
397
Gross Axle Weight Rating
...............................218
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ..........................217
Guide
Body Builders ................................................ 9
GVWR ............................................................216
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water
.....................................233
Hazard Warning Flashers ..............................236
Head Restraints ...............................................32
Headlights .....................................................249
Automatic .................................................... 43
Automatic High Beam .................................. 42
Cleaning ....................................................317
High Beam .................................................. 42
Passing........................................................ 43
Switch ......................................................... 41
Heated Mirrors ................................................ 40
Heater, Engine Block .....................................188
Hill Descent Control .......................................134
Hill Descent Control Indicator ........................134
Hill Start Assist ..............................................136
Hitches
Trailer Towing ............................................220
Hoisting .........................................................298
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .................... 73
Hood Prop........................................................ 72
Hood Release .................................................. 72
I
Ignition.............................................................16
Switch..........................................................16
Illuminated Entry ..............................................47
In Case Of Emergency ................................... 236
In Vehicle Help
Vehicle User Guide ......................................11
Inside Rearview Mirror .....................36 , 37, 236
Instrument Cluster
Descriptions
............................................. 125
Display...................................................... 106
Engine Oil Reset ....................................... 108
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 321
Integrated Trailer Brake Control ................... 224
Interior Appearance Care .............................. 319
Interior Lights ...................................................46
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..................48
Introduction ....................................................... 8
Inverter
Power
..........................................................85
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ................................. 381
J
Jack Location
................................................ 252
Jack Operation .............................................. 252
Jump Starting ............................................... 262
K
Key Fob
Panic Alarm
.................................................14
Programming Additional Key Fobs ........15, 19
Key Fob Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry)
....................................14
Key Fob Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry)
....................................15
Key-In Reminder ..............................................16
Keyless Enter-N-Go ..........................................23
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors .......................... 338
Passive Entry ...............................................23
Passive Entry Programming .........................23
Keys .................................................................12
Replacement ...............................................19
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals
........................44
Lane Change Assist ..........................................44
Latches ......................................................... 184
Hood ............................................................72
Lead Free Gasoline ....................................... 323
Leaks, Fluid ................................................... 184
Life Of Tires ................................................... 309
Light Bulbs ........................................... 184 , 248
11
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 397
398
Lights
......................................................47 , 184
Air Bag.................................... 118 , 153, 183
Automatic Headlights .................................. 43
Automatic High Beam .................................. 42
Brake Assist Warning ................................134
Brake Warning ..........................................118
Bulb Replacement .....................................248
Cargo...........................................................45
Center Mounted Stop ................................251
Courtesy/Reading ....................................... 46
Cruise .............................................. 125 , 126
Daytime Running ......................................... 42
Engine Temperature Warning ....................119
Exterior ......................................................184
Fog .....................................................44 , 250
Hazard Warning Flasher ............................236
Headlights ................................................... 41
High Beam .................................................. 42
Hill Descent Control Indicator ....................134
Interior ........................................................ 46
Low Fuel ....................................................123
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .......121
Park...........................................................125
Passing........................................................ 43
Seat Belt Reminder ...................................118
Security Alarm ...........................................119
Service ......................................................248
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .............. 138
Traction Control ........................................ 134
Turn Signals ...........44, 125, 184, 249, 251
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions
................................ 119 , 125
Limited-Slip Differential ....................... 200 , 297
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode .................... 115
Load Shed Battery Saver On ......................... 115
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ........... 115
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ............ 115
Loading Vehicle ............................................ 216
Tires ......................................................... 303
Locks
Automatic Door ............................................25
Child Protection ...........................................26
Power Door ..................................................22
Low Tire Pressure System ............................. 138
Lubrication, Body .......................................... 287
Lug Nuts ....................................................... 322
M
Maintenance Free Battery
............................ 278
Maintenance Schedule ................................. 271
Malfunction Indicator
Light (Check Engine)
............................ 121 , 128
Manual
Park Release
............................................ 265
Service ..................................................... 393
Media Hub .................................................... 381
Methanol....................................................... 325
Mirrors .............................................................36
Electric Powered ..........................................38
Heated .........................................................40
Outside ........................................................37
Rearview ..................................... 36 , 37, 236
Trailer Towing ..............................................40
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle
.........................................................10
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...................... 138
Mopar Parts .................................................. 392
MP3 Control .................................................. 381
Multi-Function Control Lever ............................41
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period
......................... 188
O
Occupant Restraints
..................................... 143
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............. 323, 324
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) ................... 235
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) ................... 235
Oil Filter, Change ........................................... 281
Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 281
Oil Pressure Light .......................................... 120
Oil Reset ....................................................... 108
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 398
399
Oil, Engine
........................................... 279 , 328
Capacity ....................................................327
Change Interval .........................................279
Dipstick .....................................................278
Disposal ....................................................281
Filter ................................................ 281 , 328
Filter Disposal ...........................................281
Identification Logo .....................................280
Materials Added To ...................................281
Pressure Warning Light .............................120
Recommendation ............................ 280 , 327
Synthetic ...................................................281
Viscosity .......................................... 280 , 327
Onboard Diagnostic System ..........................127
Operating Precautions ...................................127
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ................................... 9 , 393
Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................ 37
Overheating, Engine ......................................265
P
Paint Care
......................................................316
Panic Alarm ..................................................... 14
Parking Brake ................................................189
ParkSense System, Rear ..................... 203 , 208
Passive Entry ................................................... 23
Pedals, Adjustable ........................................... 35
Pets ...............................................................181
Pickup Box ................................................ 86 , 87
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 303
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses)
....................... 241
Door Locks ..................................................22
Inverter ........................................................85
Mirrors .........................................................38
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ................83
Seats ...........................................................28
Sliding Rear Window ....................................69
Steering .................................................... 201
Sunroof........................................................70
Windows ......................................................68
Power Seats
Down ....................................................28 , 30
Forward ................................................28 , 29
Rearward ..............................................28 , 29
Recline ........................................................29
Tilt ........................................................ 29 , 30
Up.........................................................28 , 30
Power Steering Fluid ..................................... 330
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 151
Pretensioners
Seat Belts
................................................. 151
R
Radial Ply Tires ............................................. 307
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .... 291 , 293
Radio Operation ............................................ 381
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...........................49
Rear Axle (Differential) .................................. 297
Rear Camera ................................................. 213
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails ............................93
Rear ParkSense System .......................203 , 208
Reclining Rear Seats ........................................28
Recreational Towing ...................................... 229
Shifting Into Transfer Case
Neutral (N)
............................................ 231
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Neutral (N)
............................................ 232
Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 324
Refrigerant ........................................... 283 , 284
Release, Hood ..................................................72
Reminder, Seat Belt ...................................... 144
Remote Keyless Entry ......................................13
Panic Alarm .................................................14
Programming Additional Key Fobs ........15, 19
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ...............................17
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features
............................................... 339
Uconnect Settings .................................... 339
Replacement Bulbs ....................................... 248
Replacement Keys ...........................................19
Replacement Tires ........................................ 309
Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 392
Restraints, Child ............................................ 162
Restraints, Head ..............................................32
Rotation, Tires ............................................... 315
11
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 399
400
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle
.........................182
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ......................184
Safety Defects, Reporting ..............................392
Safety Information, Tire .................................298
Safety Tips .....................................................181
Safety, Exhaust Gas .......................................182
Schedule, Maintenance .................................271
Seat Belt Reminder .......................................118
Seat Belts ............................................ 144 , 182
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...........................148
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ......148
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage .............................................148
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ............152
Child Restraints .........................................162
Energy Management Feature ....................151
Extender ....................................................150
Front Seat ....................................... 144 , 147
Inspection .................................................182
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ....................147
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...................148
Operating Instructions ...............................147
Pregnant Women ......................................151
Pretensioners ............................................151
Reminder ..................................................144
Seat Belt Extender ....................................150
Seat Belt Pretensioner ..............................151
Untwisting Procedure ................................148
Seat Belts Maintenance ............................... 320
Seats ................................................. 26 , 28, 29
Adjustment .................................... 26 , 28, 29
Folding Floor ................................................81
Power ..........................................................28
Rear Folding ................................................26
Reclining Rear .............................................28
Tilting...........................................................26
Security Alarm .........................................20 , 119
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 328
Sentry Key
Key Programming ........................................19
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................18
Sentry Key Replacement .................................19
Service Assistance ........................................ 390
Service Contract ........................................... 391
Service Manuals ........................................... 393
Shifting ......................................................... 190
Automatic Transmission ........................... 191
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer
Case Neutral (N)
................................... 231
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer
Case Neutral (N)
................................... 232
Signals, Turn ................................. 44 , 125, 184
Siri ................................................................ 386
Sliding Rear Window, Power ............................69
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 314
Snow Plow .................................................... 228
Snow Tires .................................................... 311
Spare Tires ........................................... 311 , 312
Spark Plugs ................................................... 328
Speed Control
Accel/Decel .............................................. 203
Cancel....................................................... 203
Resume .................................................... 203
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...................... 201
Starting ......................................................... 185
Automatic Transmission ........................... 185
Button..........................................................16
Cold Weather ............................................ 188
Engine Fails To Start ................................. 187
Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) ............... 185
Steering
Power
........................................................ 201
Tilt Column...................................................34
Wheel, Heated .............................................34
Wheel, Tilt ....................................................34
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...................... 380
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls
........................................................ 380
Storage Compartment, Center Seat .................79
Storage, Vehicle ..................................... 66 , 316
Storing Your Vehicle ...................................... 316
Stuck, Freeing ............................................... 267
Sun Roof ..........................................................70
Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 138
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 281
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 400
401
T
Tailgate
............................................................ 94
Telescoping Steering Column .......................... 34
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ............ 66
Tilt
Down
.................................................... 29 , 30
Up......................................................... 29 , 30
Tilt Steering Column ........................................ 34
Tip Start .........................................................185
Tire And Loading Information Placard ...........303
Tire Markings .................................................298
Tire Safety Information ..................................298
Tires...................................184 , 306, 311, 315
Aging (Life Of Tires) ...................................309
Air Pressure ...............................................306
Chains .......................................................314
Compact Spare .........................................311
General Information ........................ 306 , 311
High Speed ................................................307
Inflation Pressure ......................................307
Life Of Tires ...............................................309
Load Capacity ............................................303
Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) ............................ 122 , 138
Quality Grading ..........................................315
Radial ........................................................307
Replacement .............................................309
Rotation ....................................................315
Safety .............................................. 298 , 306
Sizes......................................................... 299
Snow Tires ................................................ 311
Spare Tires ...................................... 311 , 312
Spinning ................................................... 308
Trailer Towing ........................................... 223
Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 309
Wheel Nut Torque ..................................... 322
To Open Hood ..................................................72
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...................... 221
Tonneau Cover ........................................96 , 317
Tonneau Cover Cleaning ............................... 317
Torque Specifications ................................... 322
Towing .......................................................... 217
Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 268
Guide........................................................ 221
Recreational ............................................. 229
Weight ...................................................... 221
Towing Behind A Motorhome ........................ 229
Traction......................................................... 233
Traction Control ............................................ 138
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............................. 138
Trailer Towing ............................................... 217
Cooling System Tips ................................. 228
Hitches ..................................................... 220
Minimum Requirements ........................... 222
Mirrors .........................................................40
Tips........................................................... 227
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................ 221
Wiring ....................................................... 226
Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 221
Trailer Weight ................................................ 221
Transfer Case ................................................ 297
Electronically Shifted ................................ 196
Fluid.......................................................... 330
Transmission................................................. 191
Automatic ........................................191 , 296
Fluid.......................................................... 330
Maintenance ............................................ 296
Shifting ..................................................... 190
Transporting Pets .......................................... 181
Tread Wear Indicators ................................... 309
Turn Signals .........................44, 125, 249, 251
U
Uconnect
Uconnect Settings
.................................... 339
Uconnect Phone
Call Continuation ...................................... 380
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features .... 23, 339
Passive Entry Programming ............... 23 , 338
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 315
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....73
Universal Transmitter .......................................73
Unleaded Gasoline ........................................ 323
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .................... 148
USB ............................................................... 381
Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area ...........................93
11
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 401
402
V
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
...............322
Vehicle Loading ................................... 216 , 303
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ....................10
Vehicle Storage ......................................66 , 316
Vehicle User Guide
In Vehicle Help ............................................11
Navigation ................................................... 11
Operating Instructions ................................. 11
Searching User Guide .................................. 11
Viscosity, Engine Oil .......................................280
Voice Command ............................................383
Voice Recognition System (VR) ......................383
W
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions)
................................................. 122
Warnings And Cautions ....................................10
Warranty Information .................................... 392
Washers, Windshield ..............................48 , 278
Washing Vehicle ........................................... 317
Water
Driving Through ........................................ 233
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .......................... 313
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 313
Wind Buffeting ..........................................70 , 71
Window Fogging ...............................................67
Windows ..........................................................68
Power...........................................................68
Reset Auto-Up ..............................................69
Windshield Defroster .................................... 183
Windshield Washers .............................. 48 , 278
Fluid................................................... 48 , 278
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 287
Windshield Wipers ...........................................48
Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 287
Wipers, Intermittent .........................................48
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................49
20_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 402
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the
road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle
is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit
the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference for common
questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S.), www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously
impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with
a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may
also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and
equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or
make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-866-726-4636 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada), or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting
www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower
and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
`
RAM 1500 CLASSIC
2020 OWNER’S MANUAL
20_DS_OM_EN_USC
SECOND EDITION
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your
vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next
appointment, we know you will find the app an important extension of your Ram vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App
Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
2020 RAM 1500 CLASSIC
RAMTRUCKS.COM (U.S.) RAMTRUCK.CA (CANADA)
©2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF
THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLET
OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
CANADA
MOPAR.COM/OM
U.S.
